1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
/* vms.c -- Write out a VAX/VMS object file
|
2001-03-09 00:24:26 +01:00
|
|
|
|
Copyright 1987, 1988, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1997, 1998, 2000
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This file is part of GAS, the GNU Assembler.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
GAS is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
|
|
|
|
|
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
|
|
|
|
|
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
|
|
|
|
|
any later version.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
GAS is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
|
|
|
|
|
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
|
|
|
|
|
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
|
|
|
|
|
GNU General Public License for more details.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
|
|
|
|
along with GAS; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free
|
|
|
|
|
Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
|
|
|
|
|
02111-1307, USA. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Written by David L. Kashtan */
|
|
|
|
|
/* Modified by Eric Youngdale to write VMS debug records for program
|
|
|
|
|
variables */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Want all of obj-vms.h (as obj-format.h, via targ-env.h, via as.h). */
|
|
|
|
|
#define WANT_VMS_OBJ_DEFS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#include "as.h"
|
|
|
|
|
#include "config.h"
|
|
|
|
|
#include "subsegs.h"
|
|
|
|
|
#include "obstack.h"
|
|
|
|
|
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
/* What we do if there is a goof. */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
#define error as_fatal
|
|
|
|
|
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
#ifdef VMS /* These are of no use if we are cross assembling. */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
#include <fab.h> /* Define File Access Block */
|
|
|
|
|
#include <nam.h> /* Define NAM Block */
|
|
|
|
|
#include <xab.h> /* Define XAB - all different types*/
|
|
|
|
|
extern int sys$open(), sys$close(), sys$asctim();
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Version string of the compiler that produced the code we are
|
|
|
|
|
* assembling. (And this assembler, if we do not have compiler info.)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
char *compiler_version_string;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
extern int flag_hash_long_names; /* -+ */
|
|
|
|
|
extern int flag_one; /* -1; compatibility with gcc 1.x */
|
|
|
|
|
extern int flag_show_after_trunc; /* -H */
|
|
|
|
|
extern int flag_no_hash_mixed_case; /* -h NUM */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Flag that determines how we map names. This takes several values, and
|
|
|
|
|
* is set with the -h switch. A value of zero implies names should be
|
|
|
|
|
* upper case, and the presence of the -h switch inhibits the case hack.
|
|
|
|
|
* No -h switch at all sets vms_name_mapping to 0, and allows case hacking.
|
|
|
|
|
* A value of 2 (set with -h2) implies names should be
|
|
|
|
|
* all lower case, with no case hack. A value of 3 (set with -h3) implies
|
|
|
|
|
* that case should be preserved. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* If the -+ switch is given, then the hash is appended to any name that is
|
|
|
|
|
* longer than 31 characters, regardless of the setting of the -h switch.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
char vms_name_mapping = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static symbolS *Entry_Point_Symbol = 0; /* Pointer to "_main" */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We augment the "gas" symbol structure with this
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol *Next;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *Symbol;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Index;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol *VMS_Symbols = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol *Ctors_Symbols = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol *Dtors_Symbols = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* We need this to keep track of the various input files, so that we can
|
|
|
|
|
* give the debugger the correct source line.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
struct input_file
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct input_file *next;
|
|
|
|
|
struct input_file *same_file_fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
int file_number;
|
|
|
|
|
int max_line;
|
|
|
|
|
int min_line;
|
|
|
|
|
int offset;
|
|
|
|
|
char flag;
|
|
|
|
|
char *name;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static struct input_file *file_root = (struct input_file *) NULL;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Styles of PSECTS (program sections) that we generate; just shorthand
|
|
|
|
|
* to avoid lists of section attributes. Used by VMS_Psect_Spec().
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
enum ps_type
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
ps_TEXT, ps_DATA, ps_COMMON, ps_CONST, ps_CTORS, ps_DTORS
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* This enum is used to keep track of the various types of variables that
|
|
|
|
|
* may be present.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
enum advanced_type
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
BASIC, POINTER, ARRAY, ENUM, STRUCT, UNION, FUNCTION, VOID, ALIAS, UNKNOWN
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* This structure contains the information from the stabs directives, and the
|
|
|
|
|
* information is filled in by VMS_typedef_parse. Everything that is needed
|
|
|
|
|
* to generate the debugging record for a given symbol is present here.
|
|
|
|
|
* This could be done more efficiently, using nested struct/unions, but for now
|
|
|
|
|
* I am happy that it works.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *next;
|
|
|
|
|
/* description of what this is */
|
|
|
|
|
enum advanced_type advanced;
|
|
|
|
|
/* this record is for this type */
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
/* For advanced types this is the type referred to. I.e., the type
|
|
|
|
|
a pointer points to, or the type of object that makes up an
|
|
|
|
|
array. */
|
|
|
|
|
int type2;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Use this type when generating a variable def */
|
|
|
|
|
int VMS_type;
|
|
|
|
|
/* used for arrays - this will be present for all */
|
|
|
|
|
int index_min;
|
|
|
|
|
/* entries, but will be meaningless for non-arrays */
|
|
|
|
|
int index_max;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Size in bytes of the data type. For an array, this is the size
|
|
|
|
|
of one element in the array */
|
|
|
|
|
int data_size;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Number of the structure/union/enum - used for ref */
|
|
|
|
|
int struc_numb;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define SYMTYPLST_SIZE (1<<4) /* 16; must be power of two */
|
2000-11-28 22:29:02 +01:00
|
|
|
|
#define SYMTYP_HASH(x) ((unsigned) (x) & (SYMTYPLST_SIZE-1))
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *VMS_Symbol_type_list[SYMTYPLST_SIZE];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We need this structure to keep track of forward references to
|
|
|
|
|
* struct/union/enum that have not been defined yet. When they are ultimately
|
|
|
|
|
* defined, then we can go back and generate the TIR commands to make a back
|
|
|
|
|
* reference.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
struct forward_ref
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct forward_ref *next;
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
int struc_numb;
|
|
|
|
|
char resolved;
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
struct forward_ref *f_ref_root = (struct forward_ref *) NULL;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* This routine is used to compare the names of certain types to various
|
|
|
|
|
* fixed types that are known by the debugger.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
#define type_check(X) !strcmp (symbol_name, X)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* This variable is used to keep track of the name of the symbol we are
|
|
|
|
|
* working on while we are parsing the stabs directives.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static const char *symbol_name;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* We use this counter to assign numbers to all of the structures, unions
|
|
|
|
|
* and enums that we define. When we actually declare a variable to the
|
|
|
|
|
* debugger, we can simply do it by number, rather than describing the
|
|
|
|
|
* whole thing each time.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static structure_count = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This variable is used to indicate that we are making the last attempt to
|
|
|
|
|
parse the stabs, and that we should define as much as we can, and ignore
|
|
|
|
|
the rest */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static int final_pass;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This variable is used to keep track of the current structure number
|
|
|
|
|
* for a given variable. If this is < 0, that means that the structure
|
|
|
|
|
* has not yet been defined to the debugger. This is still cool, since
|
|
|
|
|
* the VMS object language has ways of fixing things up after the fact,
|
|
|
|
|
* so we just make a note of this, and generate fixups at the end.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static int struct_number;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This is used to distinguish between D_float and G_float for telling
|
|
|
|
|
the debugger about doubles. gcc outputs the same .stabs regardless
|
|
|
|
|
of whether -mg is used to select alternate doubles. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static int vax_g_doubles = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Local symbol references (used to handle N_ABS symbols; gcc does not
|
|
|
|
|
generate those, but they're possible with hand-coded assembler input)
|
|
|
|
|
are always made relative to some particular environment. If the current
|
|
|
|
|
input has any such symbols, then we expect this to get incremented
|
|
|
|
|
exactly once and end up having all of them be in environment #0. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static int Current_Environment = -1;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Every object file must specify an module name, which is also used by
|
|
|
|
|
traceback records. Set in Write_VMS_MHD_Records(). */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static char Module_Name[255+1];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Variable descriptors are used tell the debugger the data types of certain
|
|
|
|
|
* more complicated variables (basically anything involving a structure,
|
|
|
|
|
* union, enum, array or pointer). Some non-pointer variables of the
|
|
|
|
|
* basic types that the debugger knows about do not require a variable
|
|
|
|
|
* descriptor.
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* Since it is impossible to have a variable descriptor longer than 128
|
|
|
|
|
* bytes by virtue of the way that the VMS object language is set up,
|
|
|
|
|
* it makes not sense to make the arrays any longer than this, or worrying
|
|
|
|
|
* about dynamic sizing of the array.
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* These are the arrays and counters that we use to build a variable
|
|
|
|
|
* descriptor.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define MAX_DEBUG_RECORD 128
|
|
|
|
|
static char Local[MAX_DEBUG_RECORD]; /* buffer for variable descriptor */
|
|
|
|
|
static char Asuffix[MAX_DEBUG_RECORD]; /* buffer for array descriptor */
|
|
|
|
|
static int Lpnt; /* index into Local */
|
|
|
|
|
static int Apoint; /* index into Asuffix */
|
|
|
|
|
static char overflow; /* flag to indicate we have written too much*/
|
|
|
|
|
static int total_len; /* used to calculate the total length of variable
|
|
|
|
|
descriptor plus array descriptor - used for len byte*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Flag if we have told user about finding global constants in the text
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
section. */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
static int gave_compiler_message = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Global data (Object records limited to 512 bytes by VAX-11 "C" runtime)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static int VMS_Object_File_FD; /* File Descriptor for object file */
|
|
|
|
|
static char Object_Record_Buffer[512]; /* Buffer for object file records */
|
|
|
|
|
static int Object_Record_Offset;/* Offset to end of data */
|
|
|
|
|
static int Current_Object_Record_Type; /* Type of record in above */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Macros for moving data around. Must work on big-endian systems.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef VMS /* These are more efficient for VMS->VMS systems */
|
2000-11-28 22:29:02 +01:00
|
|
|
|
#define COPY_LONG(dest,val) ( *(long *) (dest) = (val) )
|
|
|
|
|
#define COPY_SHORT(dest,val) ( *(short *) (dest) = (val) )
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
#else
|
|
|
|
|
#define COPY_LONG(dest,val) md_number_to_chars ((dest), (val), 4)
|
|
|
|
|
#define COPY_SHORT(dest,val) md_number_to_chars ((dest), (val), 2)
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Macros for placing data into the object record buffer.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
#define PUT_LONG(val) \
|
|
|
|
|
( COPY_LONG (&Object_Record_Buffer[Object_Record_Offset], (val)), \
|
|
|
|
|
Object_Record_Offset += 4 )
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define PUT_SHORT(val) \
|
|
|
|
|
( COPY_SHORT (&Object_Record_Buffer[Object_Record_Offset], (val)), \
|
|
|
|
|
Object_Record_Offset += 2 )
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define PUT_CHAR(val) ( Object_Record_Buffer[Object_Record_Offset++] = (val) )
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define PUT_COUNTED_STRING(cp) do { \
|
|
|
|
|
register const char *p = (cp); \
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR ((char) strlen (p)); \
|
|
|
|
|
while (*p) PUT_CHAR (*p++); } while (0)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Macro for determining if a Name has psect attributes attached
|
|
|
|
|
* to it.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
#define PSECT_ATTRIBUTES_STRING "$$PsectAttributes_"
|
|
|
|
|
#define PSECT_ATTRIBUTES_STRING_LENGTH 18
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define HAS_PSECT_ATTRIBUTES(Name) \
|
|
|
|
|
(strncmp ((*Name == '_' ? Name + 1 : Name), \
|
|
|
|
|
PSECT_ATTRIBUTES_STRING, \
|
|
|
|
|
PSECT_ATTRIBUTES_STRING_LENGTH) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* in: segT out: N_TYPE bits */
|
|
|
|
|
const short seg_N_TYPE[] =
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
N_ABS,
|
|
|
|
|
N_TEXT,
|
|
|
|
|
N_DATA,
|
|
|
|
|
N_BSS,
|
|
|
|
|
N_UNDF, /* unknown */
|
|
|
|
|
N_UNDF, /* error */
|
|
|
|
|
N_UNDF, /* expression */
|
|
|
|
|
N_UNDF, /* debug */
|
|
|
|
|
N_UNDF, /* ntv */
|
|
|
|
|
N_UNDF, /* ptv */
|
|
|
|
|
N_REGISTER, /* register */
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
const segT N_TYPE_seg[N_TYPE + 2] =
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* N_TYPE == 0x1E = 32-2 */
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_UNKNOWN, /* N_UNDF == 0 */
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_ABSOLUTE, /* N_ABS == 2 */
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_TEXT, /* N_TEXT == 4 */
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_DATA, /* N_DATA == 6 */
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_BSS, /* N_BSS == 8 */
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF, SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_REGISTER, /* dummy N_REGISTER for regs = 30 */
|
|
|
|
|
SEG_GOOF,
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Local support routines which return a value. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static struct input_file *find_file PARAMS ((symbolS *));
|
|
|
|
|
static struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *find_symbol PARAMS ((int));
|
|
|
|
|
static symbolS *Define_Routine PARAMS ((symbolS *,int,symbolS *,int));
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static char *cvt_integer PARAMS ((char *,int *));
|
|
|
|
|
static char *fix_name PARAMS ((char *));
|
|
|
|
|
static char *get_struct_name PARAMS ((char *));
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static offsetT VMS_Initialized_Data_Size PARAMS ((symbolS *,unsigned));
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static int VMS_TBT_Source_File PARAMS ((char *,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static int gen1 PARAMS ((struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static int forward_reference PARAMS ((char *));
|
|
|
|
|
static int final_forward_reference PARAMS ((struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *));
|
|
|
|
|
static int VMS_typedef_parse PARAMS ((char *));
|
|
|
|
|
static int hash_string PARAMS ((const char *));
|
|
|
|
|
static int VMS_Psect_Spec PARAMS ((const char *,int,enum ps_type,
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol *));
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Local support routines which don't directly return any value. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void s_const PARAMS ((int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void Create_VMS_Object_File PARAMS ((void));
|
|
|
|
|
static void Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer PARAMS ((void));
|
|
|
|
|
static void Set_VMS_Object_File_Record PARAMS ((int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void Close_VMS_Object_File PARAMS ((void));
|
|
|
|
|
static void vms_tir_stack_psect PARAMS ((int,int,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_Store_Immediate_Data PARAMS ((const char *,int,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_Set_Data PARAMS ((int,int,int,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_Store_Struct PARAMS ((int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_Def_Struct PARAMS ((int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_Set_Struct PARAMS ((int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_TBT_Module_Begin PARAMS ((void));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_TBT_Module_End PARAMS ((void));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_TBT_Routine_Begin PARAMS ((symbolS *,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_TBT_Routine_End PARAMS ((int,symbolS *));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_TBT_Block_Begin PARAMS ((symbolS *,int,char *));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_TBT_Block_End PARAMS ((valueT));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_TBT_Line_PC_Correlation PARAMS ((int,int,int,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_TBT_Source_Lines PARAMS ((int,int,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void fpush PARAMS ((int,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void rpush PARAMS ((int,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void array_suffix PARAMS ((struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *));
|
|
|
|
|
static void new_forward_ref PARAMS ((int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void generate_suffix PARAMS ((struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void bitfield_suffix PARAMS ((struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void setup_basic_type PARAMS ((struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_DBG_record PARAMS ((struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *,int,int,char *));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_local_stab_Parse PARAMS ((symbolS *));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_stab_parse PARAMS ((symbolS *,int,int,int,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_GSYM_Parse PARAMS ((symbolS *,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_LCSYM_Parse PARAMS ((symbolS *,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_STSYM_Parse PARAMS ((symbolS *,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_RSYM_Parse PARAMS ((symbolS *,symbolS *,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_LSYM_Parse PARAMS ((void));
|
|
|
|
|
static void Define_Local_Symbols PARAMS ((symbolS *,symbolS *,symbolS *,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void Write_VMS_MHD_Records PARAMS ((void));
|
|
|
|
|
static void Write_VMS_EOM_Record PARAMS ((int,valueT));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_Case_Hack_Symbol PARAMS ((const char *,char *));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_Modify_Psect_Attributes PARAMS ((const char *,int *));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec PARAMS ((const char *,int,int,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_Local_Environment_Setup PARAMS ((const char *));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_Emit_Globalvalues PARAMS ((unsigned,unsigned,char *));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_Procedure_Entry_Pt PARAMS ((char *,int,int,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_Set_Psect PARAMS ((int,int,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_Store_Repeated_Data PARAMS ((int,char *,int,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_Store_PIC_Symbol_Reference PARAMS ((symbolS *,int,
|
|
|
|
|
int,int,int,int));
|
|
|
|
|
static void VMS_Fix_Indirect_Reference PARAMS ((int,int,fragS *,fragS *));
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Support code which used to be inline within vms_write_object_file. */
|
|
|
|
|
static void vms_fixup_text_section PARAMS ((unsigned,struct frag *,struct frag *));
|
|
|
|
|
static void synthesize_data_segment PARAMS ((unsigned,unsigned,struct frag *));
|
|
|
|
|
static void vms_fixup_data_section PARAMS ((unsigned,unsigned));
|
|
|
|
|
static void global_symbol_directory PARAMS ((unsigned,unsigned));
|
|
|
|
|
static void local_symbols_DST PARAMS ((symbolS *,symbolS *));
|
|
|
|
|
static void vms_build_DST PARAMS ((unsigned));
|
|
|
|
|
static void vms_fixup_xtors_section PARAMS ((struct VMS_Symbol *, int));
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* The following code defines the special types of pseudo-ops that we
|
|
|
|
|
use with VMS. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned char const_flag = IN_DEFAULT_SECTION;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
s_const (arg)
|
|
|
|
|
int arg; /* 3rd field from obj_pseudo_table[]; not needed here */
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* Since we don't need `arg', use it as our scratch variable so that
|
|
|
|
|
we won't get any "not used" warnings about it. */
|
|
|
|
|
arg = get_absolute_expression ();
|
|
|
|
|
subseg_set (SEG_DATA, (subsegT) arg);
|
|
|
|
|
const_flag = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
const pseudo_typeS obj_pseudo_table[] =
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
{"const", s_const, 0},
|
|
|
|
|
{0, 0, 0},
|
|
|
|
|
}; /* obj_pseudo_table */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Routine to perform RESOLVE_SYMBOL_REDEFINITION(). */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
int
|
|
|
|
|
vms_resolve_symbol_redef (sym)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sym;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the new symbol is .comm AND it has a size of zero,
|
|
|
|
|
* we ignore it (i.e. the old symbol overrides it)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (SEGMENT_TO_SYMBOL_TYPE ((int) now_seg) == (N_UNDF | N_EXT)
|
|
|
|
|
&& frag_now_fix () == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
as_warn (_("compiler emitted zero-size common symbol `%s' already defined"),
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_NAME (sym));
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the old symbol is .comm and it has a size of zero,
|
|
|
|
|
* we override it with the new symbol value.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_IS_EXTERNAL (sym) && S_IS_DEFINED (sym) && S_GET_VALUE (sym) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
as_warn (_("compiler redefined zero-size common symbol `%s'"),
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_NAME (sym));
|
|
|
|
|
sym->sy_frag = frag_now;
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_OTHER (sym, const_flag);
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_VALUE (sym, frag_now_fix ());
|
|
|
|
|
/* Keep N_EXT bit. */
|
|
|
|
|
sym->sy_symbol.n_type |= SEGMENT_TO_SYMBOL_TYPE ((int) now_seg);
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* `tc_frob_label' handler for colon(symbols.c), used to examine the
|
|
|
|
|
dummy label(s) gcc inserts at the beginning of each file it generates.
|
|
|
|
|
gcc 1.x put "gcc_compiled."; gcc 2.x (as of 2.7) puts "gcc2_compiled."
|
|
|
|
|
and "__gnu_language_<name>" and possibly "__vax_<type>_doubles". */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
|
|
|
vms_check_for_special_label (symbolP)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* Special labels only occur prior to explicit section directives. */
|
|
|
|
|
if ((const_flag & IN_DEFAULT_SECTION) != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *sym_name = S_GET_NAME (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (*sym_name == '_')
|
|
|
|
|
++sym_name;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (!strcmp (sym_name, "__vax_g_doubles"))
|
|
|
|
|
vax_g_doubles = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
#if 0 /* not necessary */
|
|
|
|
|
else if (!strcmp (sym_name, "__vax_d_doubles"))
|
|
|
|
|
vax_g_doubles = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
#if 0 /* these are potential alternatives to tc-vax.c's md_parse_options() */
|
|
|
|
|
else if (!strcmp (sym_name, "gcc_compiled."))
|
|
|
|
|
flag_one = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
else if (!strcmp (sym_name, "__gnu_language_cplusplus"))
|
|
|
|
|
flag_hash_long_names = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
|
|
|
obj_read_begin_hook ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
|
|
|
obj_crawl_symbol_chain (headers)
|
|
|
|
|
object_headers *headers;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS **symbolPP;
|
|
|
|
|
int symbol_number = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
symbolPP = &symbol_rootP; /* -> last symbol chain link. */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
while ((symbolP = *symbolPP) != NULL)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
resolve_symbol_value (symbolP, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* OK, here is how we decide which symbols go out into the
|
|
|
|
|
brave new symtab. Symbols that do are:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* symbols with no name (stabd's?)
|
|
|
|
|
* symbols with debug info in their N_TYPE
|
|
|
|
|
* symbols with \1 as their 3rd character (numeric labels)
|
|
|
|
|
* "local labels" needed for PIC fixups
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Symbols that don't are:
|
|
|
|
|
* symbols that are registers
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
All other symbols are output. We complain if a deleted
|
|
|
|
|
symbol was marked external. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (!S_IS_REGISTER (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_number = symbol_number++;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_name_offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolPP = &(symbol_next (symbolP));
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_IS_EXTERNAL (symbolP) || !S_IS_DEFINED (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
as_bad (_("Local symbol %s never defined"), S_GET_NAME (symbolP));
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
} /* oops. */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Unhook it from the chain. */
|
|
|
|
|
*symbolPP = symbol_next (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
} /* if this symbol should be in the output */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
} /* for each symbol */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H_SET_STRING_SIZE (headers, string_byte_count);
|
|
|
|
|
H_SET_SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE (headers, symbol_number);
|
|
|
|
|
} /* obj_crawl_symbol_chain() */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/****** VMS OBJECT FILE HACKING ROUTINES *******/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Create the VMS object file. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
Create_VMS_Object_File ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
#if defined(eunice) || !defined(VMS)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Object_File_FD = creat (out_file_name, 0777, "var");
|
|
|
|
|
#else /* eunice */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Object_File_FD = creat (out_file_name, 0, "rfm=var",
|
|
|
|
|
"ctx=bin", "mbc=16", "deq=64", "fop=tef",
|
|
|
|
|
"shr=nil");
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* eunice */
|
|
|
|
|
/* Deal with errors. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (VMS_Object_File_FD < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
as_fatal (_("Couldn't create VMS object file \"%s\""), out_file_name);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Initialize object file hacking variables. */
|
|
|
|
|
Object_Record_Offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
Current_Object_Record_Type = -1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Flush the object record buffer to the object file. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* If the buffer is empty, there's nothing to do. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
#ifndef VMS /* For cross-assembly purposes. */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char RecLen[2];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* "Variable-length record" files have a two byte length field
|
|
|
|
|
prepended to each record. It's normally out-of-band, and native
|
|
|
|
|
VMS output will insert it automatically for this type of file.
|
|
|
|
|
When cross-assembling, we must write it explicitly. */
|
|
|
|
|
md_number_to_chars (RecLen, Object_Record_Offset, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
if (write (VMS_Object_File_FD, RecLen, 2) != 2)
|
|
|
|
|
error (_("I/O error writing VMS object file (length prefix)"));
|
|
|
|
|
/* We also need to force the actual record to be an even number of
|
|
|
|
|
bytes. For native output, that's automatic; when cross-assembling,
|
|
|
|
|
pad with a NUL byte if length is odd. Do so _after_ writing the
|
|
|
|
|
pre-padded length. Since our buffer is defined with even size,
|
|
|
|
|
an odd offset implies that it has some room left. */
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Object_Record_Offset & 1) != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
Object_Record_Buffer[Object_Record_Offset++] = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* not VMS */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Write the data to the file. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (write (VMS_Object_File_FD, Object_Record_Buffer, Object_Record_Offset)
|
|
|
|
|
!= Object_Record_Offset)
|
|
|
|
|
error (_("I/O error writing VMS object file"));
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* The buffer is now empty. */
|
|
|
|
|
Object_Record_Offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Declare a particular type of object file record. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (Type)
|
|
|
|
|
int Type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* If the type matches, we are done. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Type == Current_Object_Record_Type)
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Otherwise: flush the buffer. */
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
/* Remember the new type. */
|
|
|
|
|
Current_Object_Record_Type = Type;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Close the VMS Object file. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
Close_VMS_Object_File ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* Flush (should never be necessary) and reset saved record-type context. */
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (-1);
|
|
|
|
|
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
#ifndef VMS /* For cross-assembly purposes. */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char RecLen[2];
|
|
|
|
|
int minus_one = -1;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Write a 2 byte record-length field of -1 into the file, which
|
|
|
|
|
means end-of-block when read, hence end-of-file when occurring
|
|
|
|
|
in the file's last block. It is only needed for variable-length
|
|
|
|
|
record files transferred to VMS as fixed-length record files
|
|
|
|
|
(typical for binary FTP; NFS shouldn't need it, but it won't hurt). */
|
|
|
|
|
md_number_to_chars (RecLen, minus_one, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
write (VMS_Object_File_FD, RecLen, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
#else
|
|
|
|
|
/* When written on a VMS system, the file header (cf inode) will record
|
|
|
|
|
the actual end-of-file position and no inline marker is needed. */
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
close (VMS_Object_File_FD);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/****** Text Information and Relocation routines ******/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Stack Psect base followed by signed, varying-sized offset.
|
|
|
|
|
Common to several object records. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
vms_tir_stack_psect (Psect_Index, Offset, Force)
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Index;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Force;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
int psect_width, offset_width;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
psect_width = ((unsigned) Psect_Index > 255) ? 2 : 1;
|
|
|
|
|
offset_width = (Force || Offset > 32767 || Offset < -32768) ? 4
|
|
|
|
|
: (Offset > 127 || Offset < -128) ? 2 : 1;
|
|
|
|
|
#define Sta_P(p,o) (((o)<<1) | ((p)-1))
|
|
|
|
|
/* byte or word psect; byte, word, or longword offset */
|
|
|
|
|
switch (Sta_P(psect_width,offset_width))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case Sta_P(1,1): PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_PB);
|
2000-11-28 22:29:02 +01:00
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR ((char) (unsigned char) Psect_Index);
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR ((char) Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case Sta_P(1,2): PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_PW);
|
2000-11-28 22:29:02 +01:00
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR ((char) (unsigned char) Psect_Index);
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case Sta_P(1,4): PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_PL);
|
2000-11-28 22:29:02 +01:00
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR ((char) (unsigned char) Psect_Index);
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case Sta_P(2,1): PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_WPB);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR ((char) Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case Sta_P(2,2): PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_WPW);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case Sta_P(2,4): PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_WPL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
#undef Sta_P
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store immediate data in current Psect. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Pointer, Size, Record_Type)
|
|
|
|
|
const char *Pointer;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
int Record_Type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register int i;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/* We can only store as most 128 bytes at a time due to the way that
|
|
|
|
|
TIR commands are encoded. */
|
|
|
|
|
while (Size > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
i = (Size > 128) ? 128 : Size;
|
|
|
|
|
Size -= i;
|
|
|
|
|
/* If we cannot accommodate this record, flush the buffer. */
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Object_Record_Offset + i + 1) >= sizeof Object_Record_Buffer)
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
/* If the buffer is empty we must insert record type. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store the count. The Store Immediate TIR command is implied by
|
|
|
|
|
a negative command byte, and the length of the immediate data
|
|
|
|
|
is abs(command_byte). So, we write the negated length value. */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR ((char) (-i & 0xff));
|
|
|
|
|
/* Now store the data. */
|
|
|
|
|
while (--i >= 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (*Pointer++);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset > (sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Make a data reference. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Data (Psect_Index, Offset, Record_Type, Force)
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Index;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Record_Type;
|
|
|
|
|
int Force;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/* If the buffer is empty we must insert the record type. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Stack the Psect base with its offset. */
|
|
|
|
|
vms_tir_stack_psect (Psect_Index, Offset, Force);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Set relocation base. */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STO_PIDR);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset > (sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Make a debugger reference to a struct, union or enum. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Struct (Struct_Index)
|
|
|
|
|
int Struct_Index;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* We are writing a debug record. */
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
/* If the buffer is empty we must insert the record type. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_UW);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Struct_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_CTL_STKDL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STO_L);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset > (sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Make a debugger reference to partially define a struct, union or enum. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Def_Struct (Struct_Index)
|
|
|
|
|
int Struct_Index;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* We are writing a debug record. */
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
/* If the buffer is empty we must insert the record type. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_UW);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Struct_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_CTL_DFLOC);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset > (sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Struct (Struct_Index)
|
|
|
|
|
int Struct_Index;
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* see previous functions for comments */
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_UW);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Struct_Index);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_CTL_STLOC);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset > (sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/****** Traceback Information routines ******/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Write the Traceback Module Begin record. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Module_Begin ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register char *cp, *cp1;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[256];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Arrange to store the data locally (leave room for size byte). */
|
|
|
|
|
cp = &Local[1];
|
|
|
|
|
/* Begin module. */
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_MODBEG;
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = 0; /* flags; not used */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Language type == "C"
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* (FIXME: this should be based on the input...)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (cp, DST_S_C_C);
|
|
|
|
|
cp += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store the module name. */
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = (char) strlen (Module_Name);
|
|
|
|
|
cp1 = Module_Name;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp1)
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = *cp1++;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Now we can store the record size. */
|
|
|
|
|
Size = (cp - Local);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = Size - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Put it into the object record. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Size, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Write the Traceback Module End record. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Module_End ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[2];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* End module. */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_MODEND;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Put it into the object record. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, 2, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Write a Traceback Routine Begin record. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Routine_Begin (symbolP, Psect)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register char *cp, *cp1;
|
|
|
|
|
char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[512];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Strip the leading "_" from the name. */
|
|
|
|
|
Name = S_GET_NAME (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
if (*Name == '_')
|
|
|
|
|
Name++;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Get the text psect offset. */
|
|
|
|
|
Offset = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Set the record size. */
|
|
|
|
|
Size = 1 + 1 + 4 + 1 + strlen (Name);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = Size;
|
|
|
|
|
/* DST type "routine begin". */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_RTNBEG;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Uses CallS/CallG. */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[2] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store the data so far. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, 3, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Make sure we are still generating a OBJ_S_C_TBT record. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Stack the address. */
|
|
|
|
|
vms_tir_stack_psect (Psect, Offset, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store the data reference. */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STO_PIDR);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store the counted string as data. */
|
|
|
|
|
cp = Local;
|
|
|
|
|
cp1 = Name;
|
|
|
|
|
Size = strlen (cp1) + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = Size - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp1)
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = *cp1++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Size, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Write a Traceback Routine End record.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
We *must* search the symbol table to find the next routine, since the
|
|
|
|
|
assember has a way of reassembling the symbol table OUT OF ORDER Thus
|
|
|
|
|
the next routine in the symbol list is not necessarily the next one in
|
|
|
|
|
memory. For debugging to work correctly we must know the size of the
|
|
|
|
|
routine. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Routine_End (Max_Size, sp)
|
|
|
|
|
int Max_Size;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size = 0x7fffffff;
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[16];
|
|
|
|
|
valueT sym_value, sp_value = S_GET_VALUE (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP = symbol_rootP; symbolP; symbolP = symbol_next (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (!S_IS_DEBUG (symbolP) && S_GET_TYPE (symbolP) == N_TEXT)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (*S_GET_NAME (symbolP) == 'L')
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
sym_value = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
if (sym_value > sp_value && sym_value < Size)
|
|
|
|
|
Size = sym_value;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dummy labels like "gcc_compiled." should no longer reach here.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
#if 0
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
/* check if gcc_compiled. has size of zero */
|
|
|
|
|
if (sym_value == sp_value &&
|
|
|
|
|
sp != symbolP &&
|
|
|
|
|
(!strcmp (S_GET_NAME (sp), "gcc_compiled.") ||
|
|
|
|
|
!strcmp (S_GET_NAME (sp), "gcc2_compiled.")))
|
|
|
|
|
Size = sym_value;
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if (Size == 0x7fffffff)
|
|
|
|
|
Size = Max_Size;
|
|
|
|
|
Size -= sp_value; /* and get the size of the routine */
|
|
|
|
|
/* Record Size. */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = 6;
|
|
|
|
|
/* DST type is "routine end". */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_RTNEND;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[2] = 0; /* unused */
|
|
|
|
|
/* Size of routine. */
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (&Local[3], Size);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store the record. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, 7, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Write a Traceback Block Begin record. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Block_Begin (symbolP, Psect, Name)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register char *cp, *cp1;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[512];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Set the record size. */
|
|
|
|
|
Size = 1 + 1 + 4 + 1 + strlen (Name);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = Size;
|
|
|
|
|
/* DST type is "begin block"; we simulate with a phony routine. */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_BLKBEG;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Uses CallS/CallG. */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[2] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store the data so far. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, 3, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Make sure we are still generating a debug record. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Now get the symbol address. */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_WPL);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Get the text psect offset. */
|
|
|
|
|
Offset = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store the data reference. */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STO_PIDR);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store the counted string as data. */
|
|
|
|
|
cp = Local;
|
|
|
|
|
cp1 = Name;
|
|
|
|
|
Size = strlen (cp1) + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = Size - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp1)
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = *cp1++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Size, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Write a Traceback Block End record. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Block_End (Size)
|
|
|
|
|
valueT Size;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[16];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = 6; /* record length */
|
|
|
|
|
/* DST type is "block end"; simulate with a phony end routine. */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_BLKEND;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[2] = 0; /* unused, must be zero */
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (&Local[3], Size);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, 7, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Write a Line number <-> Program Counter correlation record. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Line_PC_Correlation (Line_Number, Offset, Psect, Do_Delta)
|
|
|
|
|
int Line_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
int Do_Delta;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register char *cp;
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[64];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (Do_Delta == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If not delta, set our PC/Line number correlation.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
cp = &Local[1]; /* Put size in Local[0] later. */
|
|
|
|
|
/* DST type is "Line Number/PC correlation". */
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_LINE_NUM;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Set Line number. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Line_Number - 1 <= 255)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SET_LINUM_B;
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = (char) (Line_Number - 1);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (Line_Number - 1 <= 65535)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SET_LINE_NUM;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_SHORT (cp, Line_Number - 1), cp += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SET_LINUM_L;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (cp, Line_Number - 1), cp += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* Set PC. */
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SET_ABS_PC;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store size now that we know it, then output the data. */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = cp - &Local[1];
|
|
|
|
|
/* Account for the space that TIR_S_C_STO_PIDR will use for the PC. */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] += 4; /* size includes length of another longword */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, cp - Local, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Make sure we are still generating a OBJ_S_C_TBT record. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
vms_tir_stack_psect (Psect, Offset, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STO_PIDR);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Do a PC offset of 0 to register the line number. */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = 2;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_LINE_NUM;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[2] = 0; /* Increment PC by 0 and register line # */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, 3, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (Do_Delta < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* When delta is negative, terminate the line numbers.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = 1 + 1 + 4;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[1] = DST_S_C_LINE_NUM;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[2] = DST_S_C_TERM_L;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (&Local[3], Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, 7, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Do a PC/Line delta.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
cp = &Local[1];
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_LINE_NUM;
|
|
|
|
|
if (Line_Number > 1)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* We need to increment the line number. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Line_Number - 1 <= 255)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_INCR_LINUM;
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = Line_Number - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (Line_Number - 1 <= 65535)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_INCR_LINUM_W;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_SHORT (cp, Line_Number - 1), cp += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_INCR_LINUM_L;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (cp, Line_Number - 1), cp += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Increment the PC
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Offset <= 128)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* Small offsets are encoded as negative numbers, rather than the
|
|
|
|
|
usual non-negative type code followed by another data field. */
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = (char) -Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (Offset <= 65535)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_DELTA_PC_W;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_SHORT (cp, Offset), cp += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_DELTA_PC_L;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (cp, Offset), cp += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* Set size now that be know it, then output the data. */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = cp - &Local[1];
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, cp - Local, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Describe a source file to the debugger. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static int
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Source_File (Filename, ID_Number)
|
|
|
|
|
char *Filename;
|
|
|
|
|
int ID_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register char *cp;
|
|
|
|
|
int len, rfo, ffb, ebk;
|
|
|
|
|
char cdt[8];
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[512];
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef VMS /* Used for native assembly */
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned Status;
|
|
|
|
|
struct FAB fab; /* RMS file access block */
|
|
|
|
|
struct NAM nam; /* file name information */
|
|
|
|
|
struct XABDAT xabdat; /* date+time fields */
|
|
|
|
|
struct XABFHC xabfhc; /* file header characteristics */
|
|
|
|
|
char resultant_string_buffer[255 + 1];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set up RMS structures:
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
/* FAB -- file access block */
|
|
|
|
|
memset ((char *) &fab, 0, sizeof fab);
|
|
|
|
|
fab.fab$b_bid = FAB$C_BID;
|
|
|
|
|
fab.fab$b_bln = (unsigned char) sizeof fab;
|
|
|
|
|
fab.fab$l_fna = Filename;
|
|
|
|
|
fab.fab$b_fns = (unsigned char) strlen (Filename);
|
|
|
|
|
fab.fab$l_nam = (char *) &nam;
|
|
|
|
|
fab.fab$l_xab = (char *) &xabdat;
|
|
|
|
|
/* NAM -- file name block */
|
|
|
|
|
memset ((char *) &nam, 0, sizeof nam);
|
|
|
|
|
nam.nam$b_bid = NAM$C_BID;
|
|
|
|
|
nam.nam$b_bln = (unsigned char) sizeof nam;
|
|
|
|
|
nam.nam$l_rsa = resultant_string_buffer;
|
|
|
|
|
nam.nam$b_rss = (unsigned char) (sizeof resultant_string_buffer - 1);
|
|
|
|
|
/* XABs -- extended attributes blocks */
|
|
|
|
|
memset ((char *) &xabdat, 0, sizeof xabdat);
|
|
|
|
|
xabdat.xab$b_cod = XAB$C_DAT;
|
|
|
|
|
xabdat.xab$b_bln = (unsigned char) sizeof xabdat;
|
|
|
|
|
xabdat.xab$l_nxt = (char *) &xabfhc;
|
|
|
|
|
memset ((char *) &xabfhc, 0, sizeof xabfhc);
|
|
|
|
|
xabfhc.xab$b_cod = XAB$C_FHC;
|
|
|
|
|
xabfhc.xab$b_bln = (unsigned char) sizeof xabfhc;
|
|
|
|
|
xabfhc.xab$l_nxt = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Get the file information
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Status = sys$open (&fab);
|
|
|
|
|
if (!(Status & 1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
as_tsktsk (_("Couldn't find source file \"%s\", status=%%X%x"),
|
|
|
|
|
Filename, Status);
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
sys$close (&fab);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Now extract fields of interest. */
|
|
|
|
|
memcpy (cdt, (char *) &xabdat.xab$q_cdt, 8); /* creation date */
|
|
|
|
|
ebk = xabfhc.xab$l_ebk; /* end-of-file block */
|
|
|
|
|
ffb = xabfhc.xab$w_ffb; /* first free byte of last block */
|
|
|
|
|
rfo = xabfhc.xab$b_rfo; /* record format */
|
|
|
|
|
len = nam.nam$b_rsl; /* length of Filename */
|
|
|
|
|
resultant_string_buffer[len] = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
Filename = resultant_string_buffer; /* full filename */
|
|
|
|
|
#else /* Cross-assembly */
|
|
|
|
|
/* [Perhaps we ought to use actual values derived from stat() here?] */
|
|
|
|
|
memset (cdt, 0, 8); /* null VMS quadword binary time */
|
|
|
|
|
ebk = ffb = rfo = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
len = strlen (Filename);
|
|
|
|
|
if (len > 255) /* a single byte is used as count prefix */
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Filename += (len - 255); /* tail end is more significant */
|
|
|
|
|
len = 255;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* VMS */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
cp = &Local[1]; /* fill in record length later */
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SOURCE; /* DST type is "source file" */
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SRC_FORMFEED; /* formfeeds count as source records */
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SRC_DECLFILE; /* declare source file */
|
|
|
|
|
know (cp == &Local[4]);
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = 0; /* fill in this length below */
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = 0; /* flags; must be zero */
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_SHORT (cp, ID_Number), cp += 2; /* file ID number */
|
|
|
|
|
memcpy (cp, cdt, 8), cp += 8; /* creation date+time */
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (cp, ebk), cp += 4; /* end-of-file block */
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_SHORT (cp, ffb), cp += 2; /* first free byte of last block */
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = (char) rfo; /* RMS record format */
|
|
|
|
|
/* Filename. */
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = (char) len;
|
|
|
|
|
while (--len >= 0)
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = *Filename++;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Library module name (none). */
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Now that size is known, fill it in and write out the record. */
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
Local[4] = cp - &Local[5]; /* source file declaration size */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = cp - &Local[1]; /* TBT record size */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, cp - Local, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Traceback information is described in terms of lines from compiler
|
|
|
|
|
listing files, not lines from source files. We need to set up the
|
|
|
|
|
correlation between listing line numbers and source line numbers.
|
|
|
|
|
Since gcc's .stabn directives refer to the source lines, we just
|
|
|
|
|
need to describe a one-to-one correspondence. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Source_Lines (ID_Number, Starting_Line_Number, Number_Of_Lines)
|
|
|
|
|
int ID_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
int Starting_Line_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
int Number_Of_Lines;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *cp;
|
|
|
|
|
int chunk_limit;
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
char Local[128]; /* room enough to describe 1310700 lines... */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
cp = &Local[1]; /* Put size in Local[0] later. */
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SOURCE; /* DST type is "source file". */
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SRC_SETFILE; /* Set Source File. */
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_SHORT (cp, ID_Number), cp += 2; /* File ID Number. */
|
|
|
|
|
/* Set record number and define lines. Since no longword form of
|
|
|
|
|
SRC_DEFLINES is available, we need to be able to cope with any huge
|
|
|
|
|
files a chunk at a time. It doesn't matter for tracebacks, since
|
|
|
|
|
unspecified lines are mapped one-to-one and work out right, but it
|
|
|
|
|
does matter within the debugger. Without this explicit mapping,
|
|
|
|
|
it will complain about lines not existing in the module. */
|
|
|
|
|
chunk_limit = (sizeof Local - 5) / 6;
|
|
|
|
|
if (Number_Of_Lines > 65535 * chunk_limit) /* avoid buffer overflow */
|
|
|
|
|
Number_Of_Lines = 65535 * chunk_limit;
|
|
|
|
|
while (Number_Of_Lines > 65535)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SRC_SETREC_L;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (cp, Starting_Line_Number), cp += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SRC_DEFLINES_W;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_SHORT (cp, 65535), cp += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
Starting_Line_Number += 65535;
|
|
|
|
|
Number_Of_Lines -= 65535;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* Set record number and define lines, normal case. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Starting_Line_Number <= 65535)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SRC_SETREC_W;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_SHORT (cp, Starting_Line_Number), cp += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SRC_SETREC_L;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (cp, Starting_Line_Number), cp += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
*cp++ = DST_S_C_SRC_DEFLINES_W;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_SHORT (cp, Number_Of_Lines), cp += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Set size now that be know it, then output the data. */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[0] = cp - &Local[1];
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, cp - Local, OBJ_S_C_TBT);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/****** Debugger Information support routines ******/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine locates a file in the list of files. If an entry does
|
|
|
|
|
not exist, one is created. For include files, a new entry is always
|
|
|
|
|
created such that inline functions can be properly debugged. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static struct input_file *
|
|
|
|
|
find_file (sp)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct input_file *same_file = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
struct input_file *fpnt, *last = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
char *sp_name;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
for (fpnt = file_root; fpnt; fpnt = fpnt->next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (fpnt->spnt == sp)
|
|
|
|
|
return fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
last = fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
sp_name = S_GET_NAME (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
for (fpnt = file_root; fpnt; fpnt = fpnt->next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (strcmp (sp_name, fpnt->name) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (fpnt->flag == 1)
|
|
|
|
|
return fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
same_file = fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt = (struct input_file *) xmalloc (sizeof (struct input_file));
|
|
|
|
|
if (!file_root)
|
|
|
|
|
file_root = fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
last->next = fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->next = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->name = sp_name;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->min_line = 0x7fffffff;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->max_line = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->flag = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->file_number = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->spnt = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->same_file_fpnt = same_file;
|
|
|
|
|
return fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine converts a number string into an integer, and stops when
|
|
|
|
|
it sees an invalid character. The return value is the address of the
|
|
|
|
|
character just past the last character read. No error is generated. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static char *
|
|
|
|
|
cvt_integer (str, rtn)
|
|
|
|
|
char *str;
|
|
|
|
|
int *rtn;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
int ival = 0, sgn = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (*str == '-')
|
|
|
|
|
sgn = -1, ++str;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*str >= '0' && *str <= '9')
|
|
|
|
|
ival = 10 * ival + *str++ - '0';
|
|
|
|
|
*rtn = sgn * ival;
|
|
|
|
|
return str;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* The following functions and definitions are used to generate object
|
|
|
|
|
* records that will describe program variables to the VMS debugger.
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* This file contains many of the routines needed to output debugging info
|
|
|
|
|
* into the object file that the VMS debugger needs to understand symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
* These routines are called very late in the assembly process, and thus
|
|
|
|
|
* we can be fairly lax about changing things, since the GSD and the TIR
|
|
|
|
|
* sections have already been output.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine fixes the names that are generated by C++, ".this" is a good
|
|
|
|
|
example. The period does not work for the debugger, since it looks like
|
|
|
|
|
the syntax for a structure element, and thus it gets mightily confused.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
We also use this to strip the PsectAttribute hack from the name before we
|
|
|
|
|
write a debugger record. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static char *
|
|
|
|
|
fix_name (pnt)
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Kill any leading "_". */
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == '_')
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Is there a Psect Attribute to skip?? */
|
|
|
|
|
if (HAS_PSECT_ATTRIBUTES (pnt))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* Yes: Skip it. */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt += PSECT_ATTRIBUTES_STRING_LENGTH;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if ((pnt[0] == '$') && (pnt[1] == '$'))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Here we fix the .this -> $this conversion. */
|
|
|
|
|
for (pnt1 = pnt; *pnt1 != 0; pnt1++)
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt1 == '.')
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = '$';
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
return pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* When defining a structure, this routine is called to find the name of
|
|
|
|
|
the actual structure. It is assumed that str points to the equal sign
|
|
|
|
|
in the definition, and it moves backward until it finds the start of the
|
|
|
|
|
name. If it finds a 0, then it knows that this structure def is in the
|
|
|
|
|
outermost level, and thus symbol_name points to the symbol name. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static char *
|
|
|
|
|
get_struct_name (str)
|
|
|
|
|
char *str;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = str;
|
|
|
|
|
while ((*pnt != ':') && (*pnt != '\0'))
|
|
|
|
|
pnt--;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
return (char *) symbol_name;
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt-- = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
while ((*pnt != ';') && (*pnt != '='))
|
|
|
|
|
pnt--;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == ';')
|
|
|
|
|
return pnt + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
while ((*pnt < '0') || (*pnt > '9'))
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
while ((*pnt >= '0') && (*pnt <= '9'))
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
return pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Search symbol list for type number dbx_type.
|
|
|
|
|
Return a pointer to struct. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *
|
|
|
|
|
find_symbol (dbx_type)
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = VMS_Symbol_type_list[SYMTYP_HASH (dbx_type)];
|
|
|
|
|
while (spnt)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt->dbx_type == dbx_type)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = spnt->next;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if (!spnt || spnt->advanced != ALIAS)
|
|
|
|
|
return spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
return find_symbol (spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#if 0 /* obsolete */
|
|
|
|
|
/* this routine puts info into either Local or Asuffix, depending on the sign
|
|
|
|
|
* of size. The reason is that it is easier to build the variable descriptor
|
|
|
|
|
* backwards, while the array descriptor is best built forwards. In the end
|
|
|
|
|
* they get put together, if there is not a struct/union/enum along the way
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
push (value, size1)
|
|
|
|
|
int value, size1;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (size1 < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
size1 = -size1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (Lpnt < size1)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
overflow = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt -= size1;
|
|
|
|
|
md_number_to_chars (&Local[Lpnt + 1], value, size1);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (Apoint + size1 >= MAX_DEBUG_RECORD)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
overflow = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Apoint = MAX_DEBUG_RECORD - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
md_number_to_chars (&Asuffix[Apoint], value, size1);
|
|
|
|
|
Apoint += size1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (value, size)
|
|
|
|
|
int value, size;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (Apoint + size >= MAX_DEBUG_RECORD)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
overflow = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Apoint = MAX_DEBUG_RECORD - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if (size == 1)
|
|
|
|
|
Asuffix[Apoint++] = (char) value;
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
md_number_to_chars (&Asuffix[Apoint], value, size);
|
|
|
|
|
Apoint += size;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (value, size)
|
|
|
|
|
int value, size;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (Lpnt < size)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
overflow = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if (size == 1)
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt--] = (char) value;
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt -= size;
|
|
|
|
|
md_number_to_chars (&Local[Lpnt + 1], value, size);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine generates the array descriptor for a given array. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
array_suffix (spnt2)
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt2;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
int rank;
|
|
|
|
|
int total_size;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
rank = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = spnt2;
|
|
|
|
|
while (spnt->advanced != ARRAY)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = find_symbol (spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
if (!spnt)
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
total_size = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
while (spnt1->advanced == ARRAY)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
rank++;
|
|
|
|
|
total_size *= (spnt1->index_max - spnt1->index_min + 1);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = find_symbol (spnt1->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
total_size = total_size * spnt1->data_size;
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (spnt1->data_size, 2); /* element size */
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt1->VMS_type == DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE)
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (0, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (spnt1->VMS_type, 1); /* element type */
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (DSC_K_CLASS_A, 1); /* descriptor class */
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (0, 4); /* base address */
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (0, 1); /* scale factor -- not applicable */
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (0, 1); /* digit count -- not applicable */
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (0xc0, 1); /* flags: multiplier block & bounds present */
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (rank, 1); /* number of dimensions */
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (total_size, 4);
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (0, 4); /* pointer to element [0][0]...[0] */
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
while (spnt1->advanced == ARRAY)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (spnt1->index_max - spnt1->index_min + 1, 4);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = find_symbol (spnt1->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
while (spnt1->advanced == ARRAY)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (spnt1->index_min, 4);
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (spnt1->index_max, 4);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = find_symbol (spnt1->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine generates the start of a variable descriptor based upon
|
|
|
|
|
a struct/union/enum that has yet to be defined. We define this spot as
|
|
|
|
|
a new location, and save four bytes for the address. When the struct is
|
|
|
|
|
finally defined, then we can go back and plug in the correct address. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
new_forward_ref (dbx_type)
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct forward_ref *fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt = (struct forward_ref *) xmalloc (sizeof (struct forward_ref));
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->next = f_ref_root;
|
|
|
|
|
f_ref_root = fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->dbx_type = dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->struc_numb = ++structure_count;
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->resolved = 'N';
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (DST_K_TS_IND, 1); /* indirect type specification */
|
|
|
|
|
total_len = 5;
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (total_len, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
struct_number = -fpnt->struc_numb;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine generates the variable descriptor used to describe non-basic
|
|
|
|
|
variables. It calls itself recursively until it gets to the bottom of it
|
|
|
|
|
all, and then builds the descriptor backwards. It is easiest to do it
|
|
|
|
|
this way since we must periodically write length bytes, and it is easiest
|
|
|
|
|
if we know the value when it is time to write it. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static int
|
|
|
|
|
gen1 (spnt, array_suffix_len)
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
int array_suffix_len;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
switch (spnt->advanced)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case VOID:
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (DBG_S_C_VOID, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
total_len += 1;
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (total_len, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
case BASIC:
|
|
|
|
|
case FUNCTION:
|
|
|
|
|
if (array_suffix_len == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (spnt->VMS_type, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (DBG_S_C_BASIC, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
total_len = 2;
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (total_len, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (0, 4);
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (DST_K_VFLAGS_DSC, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (DST_K_TS_DSC, 1); /* descriptor type specification */
|
|
|
|
|
total_len = -2;
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
case STRUCT:
|
|
|
|
|
case UNION:
|
|
|
|
|
case ENUM:
|
|
|
|
|
struct_number = spnt->struc_numb;
|
|
|
|
|
if (struct_number < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
new_forward_ref (spnt->dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (DBG_S_C_STRUCT, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
total_len = 5;
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (total_len, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
case POINTER:
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = find_symbol (spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (!spnt1)
|
|
|
|
|
new_forward_ref (spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
i = gen1 (spnt1, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
if (i)
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* (*void) is a special case, do not put pointer suffix */
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (DBG_S_C_POINTER, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
total_len += 3;
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (total_len, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
case ARRAY:
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
while (spnt1->advanced == ARRAY)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = find_symbol (spnt1->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
if (!spnt1)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
as_tsktsk (_("debugger forward reference error, dbx type %d"),
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* It is too late to generate forward references, so the user gets a message.
|
|
|
|
|
* This should only happen on a compiler error */
|
|
|
|
|
(void) gen1 (spnt1, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
i = Apoint;
|
|
|
|
|
array_suffix (spnt);
|
|
|
|
|
array_suffix_len = Apoint - i;
|
|
|
|
|
switch (spnt1->advanced)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case BASIC:
|
|
|
|
|
case FUNCTION:
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (0, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
total_len += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (total_len, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (DST_K_VFLAGS_DSC, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (1, 1); /* flags: element value spec included */
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (1, 1); /* one dimension */
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (DBG_S_C_COMPLEX_ARRAY, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
total_len += array_suffix_len + 8;
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (total_len, 2);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
default: /* lint suppression */
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This generates a suffix for a variable. If it is not a defined type yet,
|
|
|
|
|
then dbx_type contains the type we are expecting so we can generate a
|
|
|
|
|
forward reference. This calls gen1 to build most of the descriptor, and
|
|
|
|
|
then it puts the icing on at the end. It then dumps whatever is needed
|
|
|
|
|
to get a complete descriptor (i.e. struct reference, array suffix). */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
generate_suffix (spnt, dbx_type)
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
static const char pvoid[6] = {
|
|
|
|
|
5, /* record.length == 5 */
|
|
|
|
|
DST_K_TYPSPEC, /* record.type == 1 (type specification) */
|
|
|
|
|
0, /* name.length == 0, no name follows */
|
|
|
|
|
1, 0, /* type.length == 1 {2 bytes, little endian} */
|
|
|
|
|
DBG_S_C_VOID /* type.type == 5 (pointer to unspecified) */
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Apoint = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = MAX_DEBUG_RECORD - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
total_len = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
struct_number = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
overflow = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
if (!spnt)
|
|
|
|
|
new_forward_ref (dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt->VMS_type != DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE)
|
|
|
|
|
return; /* no suffix needed */
|
|
|
|
|
gen1 (spnt, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (0, 1); /* no name (len==0) */
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (DST_K_TYPSPEC, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
total_len += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
rpush (total_len, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
/* If the variable descriptor overflows the record, output a descriptor
|
|
|
|
|
for a pointer to void. */
|
|
|
|
|
if ((total_len >= MAX_DEBUG_RECORD) || overflow)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
as_warn (_("Variable descriptor %d too complicated. Defined as `void *'."),
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (pvoid, 6, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
while (Lpnt < MAX_DEBUG_RECORD - 1)
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = Local[++Lpnt];
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = i;
|
|
|
|
|
/* we use this for reference to structure that has already been defined */
|
|
|
|
|
if (struct_number > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Lpnt, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Struct (struct_number);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* We use this for a forward reference to a structure that has yet to
|
|
|
|
|
be defined. We store four bytes of zero to make room for the actual
|
|
|
|
|
address once it is known. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (struct_number < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct_number = -struct_number;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Lpnt, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Def_Struct (struct_number);
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (&Local[Lpnt], 0L);
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Lpnt, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
while (i < Apoint)
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt++] = Asuffix[i++];
|
|
|
|
|
if (Lpnt != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Lpnt, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* "novel length" type doesn't work for simple atomic types */
|
|
|
|
|
#define USE_BITSTRING_DESCRIPTOR(t) ((t)->advanced == BASIC)
|
|
|
|
|
#undef SETUP_BASIC_TYPES
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine generates a type description for a bitfield. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
bitfield_suffix (spnt, width)
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
int width;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt++] = 13; /* rec.len==13 */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt++] = DST_K_TYPSPEC; /* a type specification record */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt++] = 0; /* not named */
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_SHORT (&Local[Lpnt], 9); /* typ.len==9 */
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt++] = DST_K_TS_NOV_LENG; /* This type is a "novel length"
|
|
|
|
|
incarnation of some other type. */
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (&Local[Lpnt], width); /* size in bits == novel length */
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Lpnt, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/* assert( spnt->struc_numb > 0 ); */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Struct (spnt->struc_numb); /* output 4 more bytes */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Formally define a builtin type, so that it can serve as the target of
|
|
|
|
|
an indirect reference. It makes bitfield_suffix() easier by avoiding
|
|
|
|
|
the need to use a forward reference for the first occurrence of each
|
|
|
|
|
type used in a bitfield. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
setup_basic_type (spnt)
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef SETUP_BASIC_TYPES
|
|
|
|
|
/* This would be very useful if "novel length" fields actually worked
|
|
|
|
|
with basic types like they do with enumerated types. However,
|
|
|
|
|
they do not, so this isn't worth doing just so that you can use
|
|
|
|
|
EXAMINE/TYPE=(__long_long_int) instead of EXAMINE/QUAD. */
|
|
|
|
|
char *p;
|
|
|
|
|
#ifndef SETUP_SYNONYM_TYPES
|
|
|
|
|
/* This determines whether compatible things like `int' and `long int'
|
|
|
|
|
ought to have distinct type records rather than sharing one. */
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt2;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* first check whether this type has already been seen by another name */
|
|
|
|
|
for (spnt2 = VMS_Symbol_type_list[SYMTYP_HASH (spnt->VMS_type)];
|
|
|
|
|
spnt2;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt2 = spnt2->next)
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt2 != spnt && spnt2->VMS_type == spnt->VMS_type)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->struc_numb = spnt2->struc_numb;
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* `structure number' doesn't really mean `structure'; it means an index
|
|
|
|
|
into a linker maintained set of saved locations which can be referenced
|
|
|
|
|
again later. */
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->struc_numb = ++structure_count;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Def_Struct (spnt->struc_numb); /* remember where this type lives */
|
|
|
|
|
/* define the simple scalar type */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt++] = 6 + strlen (symbol_name) + 2; /* rec.len */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt++] = DST_K_TYPSPEC; /* rec.typ==type specification */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt++] = strlen (symbol_name) + 2;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt++] = '_'; /* prefix name with "__" */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt++] = '_';
|
|
|
|
|
for (p = symbol_name; *p; p++)
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt++] = *p == ' ' ? '_' : *p;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_SHORT (&Local[Lpnt], 2); /* typ.len==2 */
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt++] = DST_K_TS_ATOM; /* typ.kind is simple type */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[Lpnt++] = spnt->VMS_type; /* typ.type */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, Lpnt, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
Lpnt = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* SETUP_BASIC_TYPES */
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine generates a symbol definition for a C symbol for the debugger.
|
|
|
|
|
It takes a psect and offset for global symbols; if psect < 0, then this is
|
|
|
|
|
a local variable and the offset is relative to FP. In this case it can
|
|
|
|
|
be either a variable (Offset < 0) or a parameter (Offset > 0). */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_DBG_record (spnt, Psect, Offset, Name)
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *Name_pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
int len;
|
|
|
|
|
int i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* if there are bad characters in name, convert them */
|
|
|
|
|
Name_pnt = fix_name (Name);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
len = strlen (Name_pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Psect < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* this is a local variable, referenced to SP */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 7 + len;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = spnt->VMS_type;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = (Offset > 0) ? DBG_C_FUNCTION_PARAM : DBG_C_LOCAL_SYM;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (&Local[i], Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
i += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 7 + len;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = spnt->VMS_type;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DST_K_VALKIND_ADDR;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Data (Psect, Offset, OBJ_S_C_DBG, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = len;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*Name_pnt != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *Name_pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt->VMS_type == DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE)
|
|
|
|
|
generate_suffix (spnt, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine parses the stabs entries in order to make the definition
|
|
|
|
|
for the debugger of local symbols and function parameters. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_local_stab_Parse (sp)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
char *str;
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
dbx_type = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
str = S_GET_NAME (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (str, ':');
|
|
|
|
|
if (!pnt)
|
|
|
|
|
return; /* no colon present */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = pnt++; /* save this for later, and skip colon */
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == 'c')
|
|
|
|
|
return; /* ignore static constants */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* there is one little catch that we must be aware of. Sometimes function
|
|
|
|
|
* parameters are optimized into registers, and the compiler, in its infiite
|
|
|
|
|
* wisdom outputs stabs records for *both*. In general we want to use the
|
|
|
|
|
* register if it is present, so we must search the rest of the symbols for
|
|
|
|
|
* this function to see if this parameter is assigned to a register.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp1;
|
|
|
|
|
char *str1;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt2;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == 'p')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
for (sp1 = symbol_next (sp); sp1; sp1 = symbol_next (sp1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (!S_IS_DEBUG (sp1))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (sp1) == N_FUN)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = (char *) strchr (S_GET_NAME (sp1), ':') + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt2 == 'F' || *pnt2 == 'f')
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (sp1) != N_RSYM)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
str1 = S_GET_NAME (sp1); /* and get the name */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = str;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt2 != ':')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt2 != *str1)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2++;
|
|
|
|
|
str1++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if (*str1 == ':' && *pnt2 == ':')
|
2000-07-07 18:58:25 +02:00
|
|
|
|
return; /* They are the same! Let's skip this one. */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
} /* for */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++; /* skip p in case no register */
|
|
|
|
|
} /* if */
|
|
|
|
|
} /* p block */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = cvt_integer (pnt, &dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = find_symbol (dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
if (!spnt)
|
|
|
|
|
return; /*Dunno what this is*/
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_DBG_record (spnt, -1, S_GET_VALUE (sp), str);
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = ':'; /* and restore the string */
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine parses a stabs entry to find the information required
|
|
|
|
|
to define a variable. It is used for global and static variables.
|
|
|
|
|
Basically we need to know the address of the symbol. With older
|
|
|
|
|
versions of the compiler, const symbols are treated differently, in
|
|
|
|
|
that if they are global they are written into the text psect. The
|
|
|
|
|
global symbol entry for such a const is actually written as a program
|
|
|
|
|
entry point (Yuk!!), so if we cannot find a symbol in the list of
|
|
|
|
|
psects, we must search the entry points as well. static consts are
|
|
|
|
|
even harder, since they are never assigned a memory address. The
|
|
|
|
|
compiler passes a stab to tell us the value, but I am not sure what
|
|
|
|
|
to do with it. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_stab_parse (sp, expected_type, type1, type2, Text_Psect)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
int expected_type; /* char */
|
|
|
|
|
int type1, type2, Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
char *str;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp1;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol *vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
dbx_type = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
str = S_GET_NAME (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (str, ':');
|
|
|
|
|
if (!pnt)
|
|
|
|
|
return; /* no colon present */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = pnt; /* save this for later*/
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == expected_type)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = find_symbol (dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
if (!spnt)
|
|
|
|
|
return; /*Dunno what this is*/
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now we need to search the symbol table to find the psect and
|
|
|
|
|
* offset for this variable.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = VMS_Symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
while (vsp)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = S_GET_NAME (vsp->Symbol);
|
|
|
|
|
if (pnt && *pnt++ == '_'
|
|
|
|
|
/* make sure name is the same and symbol type matches */
|
|
|
|
|
&& strcmp (pnt, str) == 0
|
|
|
|
|
&& (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (vsp->Symbol) == type1
|
|
|
|
|
|| S_GET_RAW_TYPE (vsp->Symbol) == type2))
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = vsp->Next;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if (vsp)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_DBG_record (spnt, vsp->Psect_Index, vsp->Psect_Offset, str);
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = ':'; /* and restore the string */
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* The symbol was not in the symbol list, but it may be an
|
|
|
|
|
"entry point" if it was a constant. */
|
|
|
|
|
for (sp1 = symbol_rootP; sp1; sp1 = symbol_next (sp1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on STAB type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_IS_DEBUG (sp1) || (S_GET_TYPE (sp1) != N_TEXT))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = S_GET_NAME (sp1);
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == '_')
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
if (strcmp (pnt, str) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (!gave_compiler_message && expected_type == 'G')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *long_const_msg = _("\
|
|
|
|
|
***Warning - the assembly code generated by the compiler has placed \n\
|
|
|
|
|
global constant(s) in the text psect. These will not be available to \n\
|
|
|
|
|
other modules, since this is not the correct way to handle this. You \n\
|
|
|
|
|
have two options: 1) get a patched compiler that does not put global \n\
|
|
|
|
|
constants in the text psect, or 2) remove the 'const' keyword from \n\
|
|
|
|
|
definitions of global variables in your source module(s). Don't say \n\
|
|
|
|
|
I didn't warn you! \n");
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
as_tsktsk (long_const_msg);
|
|
|
|
|
gave_compiler_message = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_DBG_record (spnt,
|
|
|
|
|
Text_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (sp1),
|
|
|
|
|
str);
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = ':';
|
|
|
|
|
/* fool assembler to not output this as a routine in the TBT */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = S_GET_NAME (sp1);
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = 'L';
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_NAME (sp1, pnt1);
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = ':'; /* and restore the string */
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Simpler interfaces into VMS_stab_parse(). */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_GSYM_Parse (sp, Text_Psect)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
int Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* Global variables */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_stab_parse (sp, 'G', (N_UNDF | N_EXT), (N_DATA | N_EXT), Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_LCSYM_Parse (sp, Text_Psect)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
int Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* Static symbols - uninitialized */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_stab_parse (sp, 'S', N_BSS, -1, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_STSYM_Parse (sp, Text_Psect)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
int Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* Static symbols - initialized */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_stab_parse (sp, 'S', N_DATA, -1, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* For register symbols, we must figure out what range of addresses
|
|
|
|
|
within the psect are valid. We will use the brackets in the stab
|
|
|
|
|
directives to give us guidance as to the PC range that this variable
|
|
|
|
|
is in scope. I am still not completely comfortable with this but
|
|
|
|
|
as I learn more, I seem to get a better handle on what is going on.
|
|
|
|
|
Caveat Emptor. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_RSYM_Parse (sp, Current_Routine, Text_Psect)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp, *Current_Routine;
|
|
|
|
|
int Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
char *str;
|
|
|
|
|
int dbx_type;
|
|
|
|
|
int len;
|
|
|
|
|
int i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int bcnt = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int Min_Offset = -1; /* min PC of validity */
|
|
|
|
|
int Max_Offset = 0; /* max PC of validity */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP = sp; symbolP; symbolP = symbol_next (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on STAB type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case N_LBRAC:
|
|
|
|
|
if (bcnt++ == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
Min_Offset = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_RBRAC:
|
|
|
|
|
if (--bcnt == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
Max_Offset = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP) - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Min_Offset != -1) && (bcnt == 0))
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (symbolP) == N_FUN)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (S_GET_NAME (symbolP), ':') + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == 'F' || *pnt == 'f') break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Check to see that the addresses were defined. If not, then there
|
|
|
|
|
were no brackets in the function, and we must try to search for
|
|
|
|
|
the next function. Since functions can be in any order, we should
|
|
|
|
|
search all of the symbol list to find the correct ending address. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Min_Offset == -1)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
int Max_Source_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int This_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Min_Offset = S_GET_VALUE (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
Max_Source_Offset = Min_Offset; /* just in case no N_SLINEs found */
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP = symbol_rootP; symbolP; symbolP = symbol_next (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case N_TEXT | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
This_Offset = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
if (This_Offset > Min_Offset && This_Offset < Max_Offset)
|
|
|
|
|
Max_Offset = This_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_SLINE:
|
|
|
|
|
This_Offset = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
if (This_Offset > Max_Source_Offset)
|
|
|
|
|
Max_Source_Offset = This_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* If this is the last routine, then we use the PC of the last source
|
|
|
|
|
line as a marker of the max PC for which this reg is valid. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Max_Offset == 0x7fffffff)
|
|
|
|
|
Max_Offset = Max_Source_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
dbx_type = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
str = S_GET_NAME (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
if ((pnt = (char *) strchr (str, ':')) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
return; /* no colon present */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = pnt; /* save this for later*/
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt != 'r')
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = find_symbol (dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
if (!spnt)
|
|
|
|
|
return; /*Dunno what this is yet*/
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = fix_name (S_GET_NAME (sp)); /* if there are bad characters in name, convert them */
|
|
|
|
|
len = strlen (pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 25 + len;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = spnt->VMS_type;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DST_K_VFLAGS_TVS; /* trailing value specified */
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (&Local[i], 1 + len); /* relative offset, beyond name */
|
|
|
|
|
i += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = len; /* name length (ascic prefix) */
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DST_K_VS_FOLLOWS; /* value specification follows */
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_SHORT (&Local[i], 15); /* length of rest of record */
|
|
|
|
|
i += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DST_K_VS_ALLOC_SPLIT; /* split lifetime */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 1; /* one binding follows */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Data (Text_Psect, Min_Offset, OBJ_S_C_DBG, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Data (Text_Psect, Max_Offset, OBJ_S_C_DBG, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DST_K_VALKIND_REG; /* nested value spec */
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (&Local[i], S_GET_VALUE (sp));
|
|
|
|
|
i += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1 = ':';
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt->VMS_type == DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE)
|
|
|
|
|
generate_suffix (spnt, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This function examines a structure definition, checking all of the elements
|
|
|
|
|
to make sure that all of them are fully defined. The only thing that we
|
|
|
|
|
kick out are arrays of undefined structs, since we do not know how big
|
|
|
|
|
they are. All others we can handle with a normal forward reference. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static int
|
|
|
|
|
forward_reference (pnt)
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt, *spnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &i);
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == ';')
|
|
|
|
|
return 0; /* no forward references */
|
|
|
|
|
do
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (pnt, ':');
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &i);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = find_symbol (i);
|
|
|
|
|
while (spnt && (spnt->advanced == POINTER || spnt->advanced == ARRAY))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = find_symbol (spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt->advanced == ARRAY && !spnt1)
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = spnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &i);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &i);
|
|
|
|
|
} while (*++pnt != ';');
|
|
|
|
|
return 0; /* no forward refences found */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Used to check a single element of a structure on the final pass. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static int
|
|
|
|
|
final_forward_reference (spnt)
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
while (spnt && (spnt->advanced == POINTER || spnt->advanced == ARRAY))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = find_symbol (spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt->advanced == ARRAY && !spnt1)
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = spnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
return 0; /* no forward refences found */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This routine parses the stabs directives to find any definitions of dbx
|
|
|
|
|
type numbers. It makes a note of all of them, creating a structure
|
|
|
|
|
element of VMS_DBG_Symbol that describes it. This also generates the
|
|
|
|
|
info for the debugger that describes the struct/union/enum, so that
|
|
|
|
|
further references to these data types will be by number
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
We have to process pointers right away, since there can be references
|
|
|
|
|
to them later in the same stabs directive. We cannot have forward
|
|
|
|
|
references to pointers, (but we can have a forward reference to a
|
|
|
|
|
pointer to a structure/enum/union) and this is why we process them
|
|
|
|
|
immediately. After we process the pointer, then we search for defs
|
|
|
|
|
that are nested even deeper.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8/15/92: We have to process arrays right away too, because there can
|
|
|
|
|
be multiple references to identical array types in one structure
|
|
|
|
|
definition, and only the first one has the definition. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static int
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_typedef_parse (str)
|
|
|
|
|
char *str;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
const char *pnt2;
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
int dtype;
|
|
|
|
|
struct forward_ref *fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
int i1, i2, i3, len;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *spnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* check for any nested def's */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (str + 1, '=');
|
|
|
|
|
if (pnt && str[1] != '*' && (str[1] != 'a' || str[2] != 'r')
|
|
|
|
|
&& VMS_typedef_parse (pnt) == 1)
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
/* now find dbx_type of entry */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = str - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == 'c')
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* check for static constants */
|
|
|
|
|
*str = '\0'; /* for now we ignore them */
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
while ((*pnt <= '9') && (*pnt >= '0'))
|
|
|
|
|
pnt--;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt++; /* and get back to the number */
|
|
|
|
|
cvt_integer (pnt, &i1);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = find_symbol (i1);
|
|
|
|
|
/* first see if this has been defined already, due to forward reference */
|
|
|
|
|
if (!spnt)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
i2 = SYMTYP_HASH (i1);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt = (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol *) xmalloc (sizeof (struct VMS_DBG_Symbol));
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->next = VMS_Symbol_type_list[i2];
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Symbol_type_list[i2] = spnt;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->dbx_type = i1; /* and save the type */
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->type2 = spnt->VMS_type = spnt->data_size = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->index_min = spnt->index_max = spnt->struc_numb = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* For structs and unions, do a partial parse, otherwise we sometimes get
|
|
|
|
|
* circular definitions that are impossible to resolve. We read enough
|
|
|
|
|
* info so that any reference to this type has enough info to be resolved.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = str + 1; /* point to character past equal sign */
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt >= '0' && *pnt <= '9')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (type_check ("void"))
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* this is the void symbol */
|
|
|
|
|
*str = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = VOID;
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if (type_check ("unknown type"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*str = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = UNKNOWN;
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt, &i1);
|
|
|
|
|
if (i1 != spnt->dbx_type)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = ALIAS;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->type2 = i1;
|
|
|
|
|
strcpy (str, pnt1);
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
as_tsktsk (_("debugginer output: %d is an unknown untyped variable."),
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
return 1; /* do not know what this is */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = str + 1; /* point to character past equal sign */
|
|
|
|
|
switch (*pnt)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case 'r':
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = BASIC;
|
|
|
|
|
if (type_check ("int"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_SLINT;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("long int"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_SLINT;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("unsigned int"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_ULINT;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("long unsigned int"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_ULINT;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("short int"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_SSINT;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 2;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("short unsigned int"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_USINT;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 2;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("char"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_SCHAR;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("signed char"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_SCHAR;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("unsigned char"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_UCHAR;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("float"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_REAL4;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("double"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = vax_g_doubles ? DBG_S_C_REAL8_G : DBG_S_C_REAL8;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 8;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("long double"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* same as double, at least for now */
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = vax_g_doubles ? DBG_S_C_REAL8_G : DBG_S_C_REAL8;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 8;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("long long int"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_SQUAD; /* signed quadword */
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 8;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("long long unsigned int"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_UQUAD; /* unsigned quadword */
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 8;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("complex float"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_COMPLX4;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 2 * 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("complex double"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = vax_g_doubles ? DBG_S_C_COMPLX8_G : DBG_S_C_COMPLX8;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 2 * 8;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (type_check ("complex long double"))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* same as complex double, at least for now */
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = vax_g_doubles ? DBG_S_C_COMPLX8_G : DBG_S_C_COMPLX8;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 2 * 8;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* [pr]
|
|
|
|
|
* Shouldn't get here, but if we do, something
|
|
|
|
|
* more substantial ought to be done...
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt->VMS_type != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
setup_basic_type (spnt);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = (char *) strchr (str, ';') + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 's':
|
|
|
|
|
case 'u':
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = (*pnt == 's') ? STRUCT : UNION;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &spnt->data_size);
|
|
|
|
|
if (!final_pass && forward_reference (pnt))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->struc_numb = -1;
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->struc_numb = ++structure_count;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1--;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = get_struct_name (str);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Def_Struct (spnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
for (fpnt = f_ref_root; fpnt; fpnt = fpnt->next)
|
|
|
|
|
if (fpnt->dbx_type == spnt->dbx_type)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->resolved = 'Y';
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Struct (fpnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Struct (spnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
i++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if (i > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Struct (spnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 11 + strlen (pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_STRUCT_START;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DST_K_VFLAGS_NOVAL; /* structure definition only */
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (&Local[i], 0L); /* hence value is unused */
|
|
|
|
|
i += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = strlen (pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt2 != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *pnt2++;
|
|
|
|
|
i2 = spnt->data_size * 8; /* number of bits */
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (&Local[i], i2);
|
|
|
|
|
i += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
if (pnt != symbol_name)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt += strlen (pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt = ':';
|
|
|
|
|
} /* replace colon for later */
|
|
|
|
|
while (*++pnt1 != ';')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (pnt1, ':');
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &dtype);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt1 + 1, &i2);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt1 + 1, &i3);
|
|
|
|
|
spnt1 = find_symbol (dtype);
|
|
|
|
|
len = strlen (pnt2);
|
|
|
|
|
if (spnt1 && (spnt1->advanced == BASIC || spnt1->advanced == ENUM)
|
|
|
|
|
&& ((i3 != spnt1->data_size * 8) || (i2 % 8 != 0)))
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* bitfield */
|
|
|
|
|
if (USE_BITSTRING_DESCRIPTOR (spnt1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* This uses a type descriptor, which doesn't work if
|
|
|
|
|
the enclosing structure has been placed in a register.
|
|
|
|
|
Also, enum bitfields degenerate to simple integers. */
|
|
|
|
|
int unsigned_type = (spnt1->VMS_type == DBG_S_C_ULINT
|
|
|
|
|
|| spnt1->VMS_type == DBG_S_C_USINT
|
|
|
|
|
|| spnt1->VMS_type == DBG_S_C_UCHAR
|
|
|
|
|
|| spnt1->VMS_type == DBG_S_C_UQUAD
|
|
|
|
|
|| spnt1->advanced == ENUM); /* (approximate) */
|
|
|
|
|
Apoint = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (19 + len, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (unsigned_type ? DBG_S_C_UBITU : DBG_S_C_SBITU, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (DST_K_VFLAGS_DSC, 1); /* specified by descriptor */
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (1 + len, 4); /* relative offset to descriptor */
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (len, 1); /* length byte (ascic prefix) */
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt2 != '\0') /* name bytes */
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (*pnt2++, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (i3, 2); /* dsc length == size of bitfield */
|
|
|
|
|
/* dsc type == un?signed bitfield */
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (unsigned_type ? DBG_S_C_UBITU : DBG_S_C_SBITU, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (DSC_K_CLASS_UBS, 1); /* dsc class == unaligned bitstring */
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (0x00, 4); /* dsc pointer == zeroes */
|
|
|
|
|
fpush (i2, 4); /* start position */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Asuffix, Apoint, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
Apoint = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* Use a "novel length" type specification, which works
|
|
|
|
|
right for register structures and for enum bitfields
|
|
|
|
|
but results in larger object modules. */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 7 + len;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE; /* type spec follows */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_STRUCT_ITEM; /* value is a bit offset */
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (&Local[i], i2); /* bit offset */
|
|
|
|
|
i += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = strlen (pnt2);
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt2 != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *pnt2++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
bitfield_suffix (spnt1, i3);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{ /* not a bitfield */
|
|
|
|
|
/* check if this is a forward reference */
|
|
|
|
|
if (final_pass && final_forward_reference (spnt1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
as_tsktsk (_("debugger output: structure element `%s' has undefined type"),
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2);
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 7 + len;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = spnt1 ? spnt1->VMS_type : DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_STRUCT_ITEM;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (&Local[i], i2); /* bit offset */
|
|
|
|
|
i += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = strlen (pnt2);
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt2 != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *pnt2++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
if (!spnt1)
|
|
|
|
|
generate_suffix (spnt1, dtype);
|
|
|
|
|
else if (spnt1->VMS_type == DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE)
|
|
|
|
|
generate_suffix (spnt1, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1++;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x01; /* length byte */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_STRUCT_END;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 'e':
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = ENUM;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->struc_numb = ++structure_count;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Def_Struct (spnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
for (fpnt = f_ref_root; fpnt; fpnt = fpnt->next)
|
|
|
|
|
if (fpnt->dbx_type == spnt->dbx_type)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->resolved = 'Y';
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Struct (fpnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Struct (spnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
i++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if (i > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Struct (spnt->struc_numb);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
len = strlen (symbol_name);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 3 + len;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_ENUM_START;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 4 * 8; /* enum values are 32 bits */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = len;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = symbol_name;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt2 != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *pnt2++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*++pnt != ';')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = (char *) strchr (pnt, ':');
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt1++ = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt1, &i1);
|
|
|
|
|
len = strlen (pnt);
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 7 + len;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_ENUM_ITEM;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DST_K_VALKIND_LITERAL;
|
|
|
|
|
COPY_LONG (&Local[i], i1);
|
|
|
|
|
i += 4;
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = len;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = *pnt++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = pnt1; /* Skip final semicolon */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = 0x01; /* len byte */
|
|
|
|
|
Local[i++] = DBG_S_C_ENUM_END;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local, i, OBJ_S_C_DBG);
|
|
|
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = pnt + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 'a':
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = ARRAY;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (pnt, ';');
|
|
|
|
|
if (!pnt)
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &spnt->index_min);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt1 + 1, &spnt->index_max);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt1 + 1, &spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (str + 1, '=');
|
|
|
|
|
if (pnt && VMS_typedef_parse (pnt) == 1)
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 'f':
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = FUNCTION;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_FUNCTION_ADDR;
|
|
|
|
|
/* this masquerades as a basic type*/
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case '*':
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = POINTER;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = DBG_S_C_ADVANCED_TYPE;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->data_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = cvt_integer (pnt + 1, &spnt->type2);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = (char *) strchr (str + 1, '=');
|
|
|
|
|
if (pnt && VMS_typedef_parse (pnt) == 1)
|
|
|
|
|
return 1;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->advanced = UNKNOWN;
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->VMS_type = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
as_tsktsk (_("debugger output: %d is an unknown type of variable."),
|
|
|
|
|
spnt->dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
return 1; /* unable to decipher */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* This removes the evidence of the definition so that the outer levels
|
|
|
|
|
of parsing do not have to worry about it. */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = str;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt1 != '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt++ = *pnt1++;
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This is the root routine that parses the stabs entries for definitions.
|
|
|
|
|
it calls VMS_typedef_parse, which can in turn call itself. We need to
|
|
|
|
|
be careful, since sometimes there are forward references to other symbol
|
|
|
|
|
types, and these cannot be resolved until we have completed the parse.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Also check and see if we are using continuation stabs, if we are, then
|
|
|
|
|
paste together the entire contents of the stab before we pass it to
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_typedef_parse. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_LSYM_Parse ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt2;
|
|
|
|
|
char *str;
|
|
|
|
|
char *parse_buffer = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
char fixit[10];
|
|
|
|
|
int incomplete, pass, incom1;
|
|
|
|
|
struct forward_ref *fpnt;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
pass = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
final_pass = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
incomplete = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
do
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
incom1 = incomplete;
|
|
|
|
|
incomplete = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
for (sp = symbol_rootP; sp; sp = symbol_next (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Deal with STAB symbols
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_IS_DEBUG (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on STAB type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case N_GSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_LCSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_STSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_PSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_RSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_LSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_FUN: /*sometimes these contain typedefs*/
|
|
|
|
|
str = S_GET_NAME (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
symbol_name = str;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = str + strlen (str) - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == '?') /* Continuation stab. */
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *spnext;
|
|
|
|
|
int tlen = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
spnext = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
do {
|
|
|
|
|
tlen += strlen (str) - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
spnext = symbol_next (spnext);
|
|
|
|
|
str = S_GET_NAME (spnext);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = str + strlen (str) - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
} while (*pnt == '?');
|
|
|
|
|
tlen += strlen (str);
|
|
|
|
|
parse_buffer = (char *) xmalloc (tlen + 1);
|
|
|
|
|
strcpy (parse_buffer, S_GET_NAME (sp));
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = parse_buffer + strlen (parse_buffer) - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt2 = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
spnext = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
do {
|
|
|
|
|
spnext = symbol_next (spnext);
|
|
|
|
|
str = S_GET_NAME (spnext);
|
|
|
|
|
strcat (pnt2, str);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 += strlen (str) - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
*str = '\0'; /* Erase this string */
|
|
|
|
|
/* S_SET_NAME (spnext, str); */
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt2 != '?') break;
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt2 = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
} while (1);
|
|
|
|
|
str = parse_buffer;
|
|
|
|
|
symbol_name = str;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if ((pnt = (char *) strchr (str, ':')) != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = pnt + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if ((pnt2 = (char *) strchr (pnt1, '=')) != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
incomplete += VMS_typedef_parse (pnt2);
|
|
|
|
|
if (parse_buffer)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* At this point the parse buffer should just
|
|
|
|
|
contain name:nn. If it does not, then we
|
|
|
|
|
are in real trouble. Anyway, this is always
|
|
|
|
|
shorter than the original line. */
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = S_GET_NAME (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
strcpy (pnt2, parse_buffer);
|
|
|
|
|
/* S_SET_NAME (sp, pnt2); */
|
|
|
|
|
free (parse_buffer), parse_buffer = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
*pnt = ':'; /* put back colon to restore dbx_type */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
} /*switch*/
|
|
|
|
|
} /* if */
|
|
|
|
|
} /*for*/
|
|
|
|
|
pass++;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make one last pass, if needed, and define whatever we can
|
|
|
|
|
* that is left.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (final_pass == 0 && incomplete == incom1)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
final_pass = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
incom1++; /* Force one last pass through */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
} while (incomplete != 0 && incomplete != incom1);
|
|
|
|
|
/* repeat until all refs resolved if possible */
|
|
|
|
|
/* if (pass > 1) printf (" Required %d passes\n", pass); */
|
|
|
|
|
if (incomplete != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
as_tsktsk (_("debugger output: Unable to resolve %d circular references."),
|
|
|
|
|
incomplete);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt = f_ref_root;
|
|
|
|
|
symbol_name = "\0";
|
|
|
|
|
while (fpnt)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (fpnt->resolved != 'Y')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (find_symbol (fpnt->dbx_type))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
as_tsktsk (_("debugger forward reference error, dbx type %d"),
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt->dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
fixit[0] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
sprintf (&fixit[1], "%d=s4;", fpnt->dbx_type);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt2 = (char *) strchr (&fixit[1], '=');
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_typedef_parse (pnt2);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
fpnt = fpnt->next;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
Define_Local_Symbols (s0P, s2P, Current_Routine, Text_Psect)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *s0P, *s2P;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *Current_Routine;
|
|
|
|
|
int Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *s1P; /* each symbol from s0P .. s2P (exclusive) */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
for (s1P = symbol_next (s0P); s1P != s2P; s1P = symbol_next (s1P))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (!s1P)
|
|
|
|
|
break; /* and return */
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (s1P) == N_FUN)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt = (char *) strchr (S_GET_NAME (s1P), ':') + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == 'F' || *pnt == 'f') break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if (!S_IS_DEBUG (s1P))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on STAB type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (s1P))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
continue; /* not left or right brace */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
case N_LSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_PSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_local_stab_Parse (s1P);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
case N_RSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_RSYM_Parse (s1P, Current_Routine, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
} /*switch*/
|
|
|
|
|
} /* for */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* This function crawls the symbol chain searching for local symbols that
|
|
|
|
|
need to be described to the debugger. When we enter a new scope with
|
|
|
|
|
a "{", it creates a new "block", which helps the debugger keep track
|
|
|
|
|
of which scope we are currently in. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static symbolS *
|
|
|
|
|
Define_Routine (s0P, Level, Current_Routine, Text_Psect)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *s0P;
|
|
|
|
|
int Level;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *Current_Routine;
|
|
|
|
|
int Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *s1P;
|
|
|
|
|
valueT Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int rcount = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
for (s1P = symbol_next (s0P); s1P != 0; s1P = symbol_next (s1P))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (s1P) == N_FUN)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt = (char *) strchr (S_GET_NAME (s1P), ':') + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*pnt == 'F' || *pnt == 'f') break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
if (!S_IS_DEBUG (s1P))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on STAB type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (s1P))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
continue; /* not left or right brace */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
case N_LBRAC:
|
|
|
|
|
if (Level != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char str[10];
|
|
|
|
|
sprintf (str, "$%d", rcount++);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Block_Begin (s1P, Text_Psect, str);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
Offset = S_GET_VALUE (s1P); /* side-effect: fully resolve symbol */
|
|
|
|
|
Define_Local_Symbols (s0P, s1P, Current_Routine, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
s1P = Define_Routine (s1P, Level + 1, Current_Routine, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Level != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Block_End (S_GET_VALUE (s1P) - Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
s0P = s1P;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
case N_RBRAC:
|
|
|
|
|
return s1P;
|
|
|
|
|
} /*switch*/
|
|
|
|
|
} /* for */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* We end up here if there were no brackets in this function.
|
|
|
|
|
Define everything. */
|
|
|
|
|
Define_Local_Symbols (s0P, (symbolS *)0, Current_Routine, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
return s1P;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#ifndef VMS
|
|
|
|
|
#include <sys/types.h>
|
|
|
|
|
#include <time.h>
|
|
|
|
|
static void get_VMS_time_on_unix PARAMS ((char *));
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Manufacture a VMS-like time string on a Unix based system. */
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
get_VMS_time_on_unix (Now)
|
|
|
|
|
char *Now;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt;
|
|
|
|
|
time_t timeb;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
time (&timeb);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = ctime (&timeb);
|
|
|
|
|
pnt[3] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt[7] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt[10] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt[16] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt[24] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
sprintf (Now, "%2s-%3s-%s %s", pnt + 8, pnt + 4, pnt + 20, pnt + 11);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* not VMS */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Write the MHD (Module Header) records. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
Write_VMS_MHD_Records ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register const char *cp;
|
|
|
|
|
register char *cp1;
|
|
|
|
|
register int i;
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef VMS
|
|
|
|
|
struct { unsigned short len, mbz; char *ptr; } Descriptor;
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
char Now[17+1];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* We are writing a module header record. */
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_HDR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* ***************************
|
|
|
|
|
* *MAIN MODULE HEADER RECORD*
|
|
|
|
|
* ***************************
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store record type and header type. */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_HDR);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (MHD_S_C_MHD);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Structure level is 0. */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_STRLVL);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Maximum record size is size of the object record buffer. */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer));
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* FIXME: module name and version should be user
|
|
|
|
|
* specifiable via `.ident' and/or `#pragma ident'.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Get module name (the FILENAME part of the object file). */
|
|
|
|
|
cp = out_file_name;
|
|
|
|
|
cp1 = Module_Name;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (*cp == ']' || *cp == '>' || *cp == ':' || *cp == '/')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
cp1 = Module_Name;
|
|
|
|
|
cp++;
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
*cp1++ = islower (*cp) ? toupper (*cp++) : *cp++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
*cp1 = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Limit it to 31 characters and store in the object record. */
|
|
|
|
|
while (--cp1 >= Module_Name)
|
|
|
|
|
if (*cp1 == '.')
|
|
|
|
|
*cp1 = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
if (strlen (Module_Name) > 31)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (flag_hash_long_names)
|
|
|
|
|
as_tsktsk (_("Module name truncated: %s\n"), Module_Name);
|
|
|
|
|
Module_Name[31] = '\0';
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_COUNTED_STRING (Module_Name);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Module Version is "V1.0". */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_COUNTED_STRING ("V1.0");
|
|
|
|
|
/* Creation time is "now" (17 chars of time string): "dd-MMM-yyyy hh:mm". */
|
|
|
|
|
#ifndef VMS
|
|
|
|
|
get_VMS_time_on_unix (Now);
|
|
|
|
|
#else /* VMS */
|
|
|
|
|
Descriptor.len = sizeof Now - 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Descriptor.mbz = 0; /* type & class unspecified */
|
|
|
|
|
Descriptor.ptr = Now;
|
|
|
|
|
(void) sys$asctim ((unsigned short *)0, &Descriptor, (long *)0, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* VMS */
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Now[i]);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Patch time is "never" (17 zeros). */
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (0);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Force this to be a separate output record. */
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* *************************
|
|
|
|
|
* *LANGUAGE PROCESSOR NAME*
|
|
|
|
|
* *************************
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store record type and header type. */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_HDR);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (MHD_S_C_LNM);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store language processor name and version (not a counted string!).
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* This is normally supplied by the gcc driver for the command line
|
|
|
|
|
* which invokes gas. If absent, we fall back to gas's version.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
cp = compiler_version_string;
|
|
|
|
|
if (cp == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
cp = "GNU AS V";
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (*cp++);
|
|
|
|
|
cp = VERSION;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp >= ' ')
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (*cp++);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Force this to be a separate output record. */
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Write the EOM (End Of Module) record. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
Write_VMS_EOM_Record (Psect, Offset)
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
valueT Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing an end-of-module record
|
|
|
|
|
* (this assumes that the entry point will always be in a psect
|
|
|
|
|
* represented by a single byte, which is the case for code in
|
|
|
|
|
* Text_Psect==0)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_EOM);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_EOM); /* Record type. */
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (0); /* Error severity level (we ignore it). */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the entry point, if it exists
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Psect >= 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* Flush the record; this will be our final output. */
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* this hash routine borrowed from GNU-EMACS, and strengthened slightly ERY*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static int
|
|
|
|
|
hash_string (ptr)
|
|
|
|
|
const char *ptr;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register const unsigned char *p = (unsigned char *) ptr;
|
|
|
|
|
register const unsigned char *end = p + strlen (ptr);
|
|
|
|
|
register unsigned char c;
|
|
|
|
|
register int hash = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
while (p != end)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
c = *p++;
|
|
|
|
|
hash = ((hash << 3) + (hash << 15) + (hash >> 28) + c);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
return hash;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Generate a Case-Hacked VMS symbol name (limited to 31 chars)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Case_Hack_Symbol (In, Out)
|
|
|
|
|
register const char *In;
|
|
|
|
|
register char *Out;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
long int init;
|
|
|
|
|
long int result;
|
|
|
|
|
char *pnt = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
char *new_name;
|
|
|
|
|
const char *old_name;
|
|
|
|
|
register int i;
|
|
|
|
|
int destructor = 0; /*hack to allow for case sens in a destructor*/
|
|
|
|
|
int truncate = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int Case_Hack_Bits = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int Saw_Dollar = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
static char Hex_Table[16] =
|
|
|
|
|
{'0', '1', '2', '3', '4', '5', '6', '7', '8', '9', 'A', 'B', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'F'};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Kill any leading "_"
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((In[0] == '_') && ((In[1] > '9') || (In[1] < '0')))
|
|
|
|
|
In++;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
new_name = Out; /* save this for later*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#if barfoo /* Dead code */
|
|
|
|
|
if ((In[0] == '_') && (In[1] == '$') && (In[2] == '_'))
|
|
|
|
|
destructor = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* We may need to truncate the symbol, save the hash for later*/
|
|
|
|
|
result = (strlen (In) > 23) ? hash_string (In) : 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Is there a Psect Attribute to skip??
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (HAS_PSECT_ATTRIBUTES (In))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Yes: Skip it
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
In += PSECT_ATTRIBUTES_STRING_LENGTH;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*In)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if ((In[0] == '$') && (In[1] == '$'))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
In += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
In++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
old_name = In;
|
|
|
|
|
/* if (strlen (In) > 31 && flag_hash_long_names)
|
|
|
|
|
as_tsktsk ("Symbol name truncated: %s\n", In); */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Do the case conversion
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
i = 23; /* Maximum of 23 chars */
|
|
|
|
|
while (*In && (--i >= 0))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Case_Hack_Bits <<= 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*In == '$')
|
|
|
|
|
Saw_Dollar = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if ((destructor == 1) && (i == 21))
|
|
|
|
|
Saw_Dollar = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
switch (vms_name_mapping)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case 0:
|
|
|
|
|
if (isupper (*In)) {
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = *In++;
|
|
|
|
|
Case_Hack_Bits |= 1;
|
|
|
|
|
} else {
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = islower (*In) ? toupper (*In++) : *In++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 3: *Out++ = *In++;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 2:
|
|
|
|
|
if (islower (*In)) {
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = *In++;
|
|
|
|
|
} else {
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = isupper (*In) ? tolower (*In++) : *In++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If we saw a dollar sign, we don't do case hacking
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (flag_no_hash_mixed_case || Saw_Dollar)
|
|
|
|
|
Case_Hack_Bits = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If we have more than 23 characters and everything is lowercase
|
|
|
|
|
* we can insert the full 31 characters
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (*In)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We have more than 23 characters
|
|
|
|
|
* If we must add the case hack, then we have truncated the str
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
pnt = Out;
|
|
|
|
|
truncate = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (Case_Hack_Bits == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* And so far they are all lower case:
|
|
|
|
|
* Check up to 8 more characters
|
|
|
|
|
* and ensure that they are lowercase
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; (In[i] != 0) && (i < 8); i++)
|
|
|
|
|
if (isupper (In[i]) && !Saw_Dollar && !flag_no_hash_mixed_case)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (In[i] == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
truncate = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if ((i == 8) || (In[i] == 0))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* They are: Copy up to 31 characters
|
|
|
|
|
* to the output string
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
i = 8;
|
|
|
|
|
while ((--i >= 0) && (*In))
|
|
|
|
|
switch (vms_name_mapping){
|
|
|
|
|
case 0: *Out++ = islower (*In) ? toupper (*In++) : *In++;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 3: *Out++ = *In++;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 2: *Out++ = isupper (*In) ? tolower (*In++) : *In++;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If there were any uppercase characters in the name we
|
|
|
|
|
* take on the case hacking string
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Old behavior for regular GNU-C compiler */
|
|
|
|
|
if (!flag_hash_long_names)
|
|
|
|
|
truncate = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Case_Hack_Bits != 0) || (truncate == 1))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (truncate == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = '_';
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 6; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = Hex_Table[Case_Hack_Bits & 0xf];
|
|
|
|
|
Case_Hack_Bits >>= 4;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = 'X';
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Out = pnt; /*Cut back to 23 characters maximum */
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = '_';
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 7; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
init = result & 0x01f;
|
|
|
|
|
*Out++ = (init < 10) ? ('0' + init) : ('A' + init - 10);
|
|
|
|
|
result = result >> 5;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
} /*Case Hack */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*Out = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
if (truncate == 1 && flag_hash_long_names && flag_show_after_trunc)
|
|
|
|
|
as_tsktsk (_("Symbol %s replaced by %s\n"), old_name, new_name);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan a symbol name for a psect attribute specification
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
#define GLOBALSYMBOL_BIT 0x10000
|
|
|
|
|
#define GLOBALVALUE_BIT 0x20000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Modify_Psect_Attributes (Name, Attribute_Pointer)
|
|
|
|
|
const char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
int *Attribute_Pointer;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register int i;
|
|
|
|
|
register const char *cp;
|
|
|
|
|
int Negate;
|
|
|
|
|
static const struct
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
const char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
int Value;
|
|
|
|
|
} Attributes[] =
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
{"PIC", GPS_S_M_PIC},
|
|
|
|
|
{"LIB", GPS_S_M_LIB},
|
|
|
|
|
{"OVR", GPS_S_M_OVR},
|
|
|
|
|
{"REL", GPS_S_M_REL},
|
|
|
|
|
{"GBL", GPS_S_M_GBL},
|
|
|
|
|
{"SHR", GPS_S_M_SHR},
|
|
|
|
|
{"EXE", GPS_S_M_EXE},
|
|
|
|
|
{"RD", GPS_S_M_RD},
|
|
|
|
|
{"WRT", GPS_S_M_WRT},
|
|
|
|
|
{"VEC", GPS_S_M_VEC},
|
|
|
|
|
{"GLOBALSYMBOL", GLOBALSYMBOL_BIT},
|
|
|
|
|
{"GLOBALVALUE", GLOBALVALUE_BIT},
|
|
|
|
|
{0, 0}
|
|
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Kill leading "_"
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (*Name == '_')
|
|
|
|
|
Name++;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Check for a PSECT attribute list
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (!HAS_PSECT_ATTRIBUTES (Name))
|
|
|
|
|
return; /* If not, return */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Skip the attribute list indicator
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Name += PSECT_ATTRIBUTES_STRING_LENGTH;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Process the attributes ("_" separated, "$" terminated)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
while (*Name != '$')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Assume not negating
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Negate = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Check for "NO"
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Name[0] == 'N') && (Name[1] == 'O'))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are negating (and skip the NO)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Negate = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Name += 2;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Find the token delimiter
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
cp = Name;
|
|
|
|
|
while (*cp && (*cp != '_') && (*cp != '$'))
|
|
|
|
|
cp++;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Look for the token in the attribute list
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; Attributes[i].Name; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the strings match, set/clear the attr.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (strncmp (Name, Attributes[i].Name, cp - Name) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set or clear
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Negate)
|
|
|
|
|
*Attribute_Pointer &=
|
|
|
|
|
~Attributes[i].Value;
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
*Attribute_Pointer |=
|
|
|
|
|
Attributes[i].Value;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now skip the attribute
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Name = cp;
|
|
|
|
|
if (*Name == '_')
|
|
|
|
|
Name++;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define GBLSYM_REF 0
|
|
|
|
|
#define GBLSYM_DEF 1
|
|
|
|
|
#define GBLSYM_VAL 2
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
#define GBLSYM_LCL 4 /* not GBL after all... */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
#define GBLSYM_WEAK 8
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define a global symbol (or possibly a local one).
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (Name, Psect_Number, Psect_Offset, Flags)
|
|
|
|
|
const char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Flags;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[32];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a GSD record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_GSD);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert the GSD record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_GSD);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a Global (or local) symbol definition subrecord.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR ((Flags & GBLSYM_LCL) != 0 ? GSD_S_C_LSY :
|
|
|
|
|
((unsigned) Psect_Number <= 255) ? GSD_S_C_SYM : GSD_S_C_SYMW);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Data type is undefined
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (0);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Switch on Definition/Reference
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Flags & GBLSYM_DEF) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Reference
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (((Flags & GBLSYM_VAL) == 0) ? GSY_S_M_REL : 0);
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Flags & GBLSYM_LCL) != 0) /* local symbols have extra field */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Current_Environment);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
int sym_flags;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Definition
|
|
|
|
|
*[ assert (LSY_S_M_DEF == GSY_S_M_DEF && LSY_S_M_REL == GSY_S_M_REL); ]
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
sym_flags = GSY_S_M_DEF;
|
|
|
|
|
if (Flags & GBLSYM_WEAK)
|
|
|
|
|
sym_flags |= GSY_S_M_WEAK;
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Flags & GBLSYM_VAL) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
sym_flags |= GSY_S_M_REL;
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (sym_flags);
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Flags & GBLSYM_LCL) != 0) /* local symbols have extra field */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Current_Environment);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Psect Number
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Flags & GBLSYM_LCL) == 0 && (unsigned) Psect_Number <= 255)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Psect_Number);
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect_Number);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Psect_Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Finally, the global symbol name
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Case_Hack_Symbol (Name, Local);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_COUNTED_STRING (Local);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset > (sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define an environment to support local symbol references.
|
|
|
|
|
* This is just to mollify the linker; we don't actually do
|
|
|
|
|
* anything useful with it.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Local_Environment_Setup (Env_Name)
|
|
|
|
|
const char *Env_Name;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* We are writing a GSD record. */
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_GSD);
|
|
|
|
|
/* If the buffer is empty we must insert the GSD record type. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_GSD);
|
|
|
|
|
/* We are writing an ENV subrecord. */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (GSD_S_C_ENV);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
++Current_Environment; /* index of environment being defined */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* ENV$W_FLAGS: we are defining the next environment. It's not nested. */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (ENV_S_M_DEF);
|
|
|
|
|
/* ENV$W_ENVINDX: index is always 0 for non-nested definitions. */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (0);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* ENV$B_NAMLNG + ENV$T_NAME: environment name in ASCIC format. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (!Env_Name) Env_Name = "";
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_COUNTED_STRING ((char *)Env_Name);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset > (sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define a psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static int
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Psect_Spec (Name, Size, Type, vsp)
|
|
|
|
|
const char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
enum ps_type Type;
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol *vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[32];
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Attributes;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Generate the appropriate PSECT flags given the PSECT type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (Type)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case ps_TEXT:
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
/* Text psects are PIC,noOVR,REL,noGBL,SHR,EXE,RD,noWRT. */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes = (GPS_S_M_PIC|GPS_S_M_REL|GPS_S_M_SHR|GPS_S_M_EXE
|
|
|
|
|
|GPS_S_M_RD);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case ps_DATA:
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
/* Data psects are PIC,noOVR,REL,noGBL,noSHR,noEXE,RD,WRT. */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes = (GPS_S_M_PIC|GPS_S_M_REL|GPS_S_M_RD|GPS_S_M_WRT);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case ps_COMMON:
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
/* Common block psects are: PIC,OVR,REL,GBL,noSHR,noEXE,RD,WRT. */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes = (GPS_S_M_PIC|GPS_S_M_OVR|GPS_S_M_REL|GPS_S_M_GBL
|
|
|
|
|
|GPS_S_M_RD|GPS_S_M_WRT);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case ps_CONST:
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
/* Const data psects are: PIC,OVR,REL,GBL,noSHR,noEXE,RD,noWRT. */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes = (GPS_S_M_PIC|GPS_S_M_OVR|GPS_S_M_REL|GPS_S_M_GBL
|
|
|
|
|
|GPS_S_M_RD);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case ps_CTORS:
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
/* Ctor psects are PIC,noOVR,REL,GBL,noSHR,noEXE,RD,noWRT. */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes = (GPS_S_M_PIC|GPS_S_M_REL|GPS_S_M_GBL|GPS_S_M_RD);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case ps_DTORS:
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
/* Dtor psects are PIC,noOVR,REL,GBL,noSHR,noEXE,RD,noWRT. */
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes = (GPS_S_M_PIC|GPS_S_M_REL|GPS_S_M_GBL|GPS_S_M_RD);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
/* impossible */
|
|
|
|
|
error (_("Unknown VMS psect type (%ld)"), (long) Type);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Modify the psect attributes according to any attribute string
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (vsp && S_GET_TYPE (vsp->Symbol) == N_ABS)
|
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes |= GLOBALVALUE_BIT;
|
|
|
|
|
else if (HAS_PSECT_ATTRIBUTES (Name))
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Modify_Psect_Attributes (Name, &Psect_Attributes);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Check for globalref/def/val.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Psect_Attributes & GLOBALVALUE_BIT) != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* globalvalue symbols were generated before. This code
|
|
|
|
|
* prevents unsightly psect buildup, and makes sure that
|
|
|
|
|
* fixup references are emitted correctly.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = -1; /* to catch errors */
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_TYPE (vsp->Symbol, N_UNDF); /* make refs work */
|
|
|
|
|
return 1; /* decrement psect counter */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Psect_Attributes & GLOBALSYMBOL_BIT) != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (vsp->Symbol))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case N_UNDF | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (Name, vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset, GBLSYM_REF);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = -1;
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_TYPE (vsp->Symbol, N_UNDF);
|
|
|
|
|
return 1; /* return and indicate no psect */
|
|
|
|
|
case N_DATA | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (Name, vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset, GBLSYM_DEF);
|
|
|
|
|
/* In this case we still generate the psect */
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
as_fatal (_("Globalsymbol attribute for symbol %s was unexpected."),
|
|
|
|
|
Name);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
} /* switch */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes &= 0xffff; /* clear out the globalref/def stuff */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a GSD record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_GSD);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert the GSD record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_GSD);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a PSECT definition subrecord
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (GSD_S_C_PSC);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Psects are always LONGWORD aligned
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (2);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Specify the psect attributes
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect_Attributes);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Specify the allocation
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Size);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Finally, the psect name
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Case_Hack_Symbol (Name, Local);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_COUNTED_STRING (Local);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset > (sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Given the pointer to a symbol we calculate how big the data at the
|
|
|
|
|
symbol is. We do this by looking for the next symbol (local or global)
|
|
|
|
|
which will indicate the start of another datum. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static offsetT
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Initialized_Data_Size (s0P, End_Of_Data)
|
|
|
|
|
register symbolS *s0P;
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned End_Of_Data;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *s1P;
|
|
|
|
|
valueT s0P_val = S_GET_VALUE (s0P), s1P_val,
|
|
|
|
|
nearest_val = (valueT) End_Of_Data;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Find the nearest symbol what follows this one. */
|
|
|
|
|
for (s1P = symbol_rootP; s1P; s1P = symbol_next (s1P))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* The data type must match. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_TYPE (s1P) != N_DATA)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
s1P_val = S_GET_VALUE (s1P);
|
|
|
|
|
if (s1P_val > s0P_val && s1P_val < nearest_val)
|
|
|
|
|
nearest_val = s1P_val;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* Calculate its size. */
|
|
|
|
|
return (offsetT) (nearest_val - s0P_val);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Check symbol names for the Psect hack with a globalvalue, and then
|
|
|
|
|
generate globalvalues for those that have it. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Emit_Globalvalues (text_siz, data_siz, Data_Segment)
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned text_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned data_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
char *Data_Segment;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
char *stripped_name, *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Attributes;
|
|
|
|
|
int globalvalue;
|
|
|
|
|
int typ, abstyp;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan the symbol table for globalvalues, and emit def/ref when
|
|
|
|
|
* required. These will be caught again later and converted to
|
|
|
|
|
* N_UNDF
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (sp = symbol_rootP; sp; sp = sp->sy_next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
typ = S_GET_RAW_TYPE (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
abstyp = ((typ & ~N_EXT) == N_ABS);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* See if this is something we want to look at.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (!abstyp &&
|
|
|
|
|
typ != (N_DATA | N_EXT) &&
|
|
|
|
|
typ != (N_UNDF | N_EXT))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* See if this has globalvalue specification.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Name = S_GET_NAME (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (abstyp)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
stripped_name = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes = GLOBALVALUE_BIT;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if (HAS_PSECT_ATTRIBUTES (Name))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
stripped_name = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (Name) + 1);
|
|
|
|
|
strcpy (stripped_name, Name);
|
|
|
|
|
Psect_Attributes = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Modify_Psect_Attributes (stripped_name, &Psect_Attributes);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Psect_Attributes & GLOBALVALUE_BIT) != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
switch (typ)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case N_ABS:
|
|
|
|
|
/* Local symbol references will want
|
|
|
|
|
to have an environment defined. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Current_Environment < 0)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Local_Environment_Setup (".N_ABS");
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (Name, 0,
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
GBLSYM_DEF|GBLSYM_VAL|GBLSYM_LCL);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_ABS | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (Name, 0,
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
GBLSYM_DEF|GBLSYM_VAL);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_UNDF | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (stripped_name, 0, 0, GBLSYM_VAL);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_DATA | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
Size = VMS_Initialized_Data_Size (sp, text_siz + data_siz);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Size > 4)
|
|
|
|
|
error (_("Invalid data type for globalvalue"));
|
2000-09-14 13:48:26 +02:00
|
|
|
|
globalvalue = md_chars_to_number (Data_Segment +
|
1999-05-03 09:29:11 +02:00
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (sp) - text_siz , Size);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Three times for good luck. The linker seems to get confused
|
|
|
|
|
if there are fewer than three */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (stripped_name, 0, 0, GBLSYM_VAL);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (stripped_name, 0, globalvalue,
|
|
|
|
|
GBLSYM_DEF|GBLSYM_VAL);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (stripped_name, 0, globalvalue,
|
|
|
|
|
GBLSYM_DEF|GBLSYM_VAL);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
as_warn (_("Invalid globalvalue of %s"), stripped_name);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
} /* switch */
|
|
|
|
|
} /* if */
|
|
|
|
|
if (stripped_name) free (stripped_name); /* clean up */
|
|
|
|
|
} /* for */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define a procedure entry pt/mask
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Procedure_Entry_Pt (Name, Psect_Number, Psect_Offset, Entry_Mask)
|
|
|
|
|
char *Name;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Entry_Mask;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[32];
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a GSD record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (OBJ_S_C_GSD);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert the GSD record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (OBJ_S_C_GSD);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a Procedure Entry Pt/Mask subrecord
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (((unsigned) Psect_Number <= 255) ? GSD_S_C_EPM : GSD_S_C_EPMW);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Data type is undefined
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (0);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flags = "RELOCATABLE" and "DEFINED"
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (GSY_S_M_DEF | GSY_S_M_REL);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Psect Number
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((unsigned) Psect_Number <= 255)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Psect_Number);
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Psect_Number);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Psect_Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Entry mask
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Entry_Mask);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Finally, the global symbol name
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Case_Hack_Symbol (Name, Local);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_COUNTED_STRING (Local);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset > (sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set the current location counter to a particular Psect and Offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (Psect_Index, Offset, Record_Type)
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Index;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Record_Type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a "Record_Type" record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert the record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack the Psect base + Offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
vms_tir_stack_psect (Psect_Index, Offset, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set relocation base
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_CTL_SETRB);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset > (sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store repeated immediate data in current Psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Repeated_Data (Repeat_Count, Pointer, Size, Record_Type)
|
|
|
|
|
int Repeat_Count;
|
|
|
|
|
register char *Pointer;
|
|
|
|
|
int Size;
|
|
|
|
|
int Record_Type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Ignore zero bytes/words/longwords
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (Size)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case 4:
|
|
|
|
|
if (Pointer[3] != 0 || Pointer[2] != 0) break;
|
|
|
|
|
/* else FALLTHRU */
|
|
|
|
|
case 2:
|
|
|
|
|
if (Pointer[1] != 0) break;
|
|
|
|
|
/* else FALLTHRU */
|
|
|
|
|
case 1:
|
|
|
|
|
if (Pointer[0] != 0) break;
|
|
|
|
|
/* zero value */
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the data is too big for a TIR_S_C_STO_RIVB sub-record
|
|
|
|
|
* then we do it manually
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Size > 255)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
while (--Repeat_Count >= 0)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Pointer, Size, Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a "Record_Type" record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack the repeat count
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_LW);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Repeat_Count);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* And now the command and its data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STO_RIVB);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Size);
|
|
|
|
|
while (--Size >= 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (*Pointer++);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset > (sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store a Position Independent Reference
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_PIC_Symbol_Reference (Symbol, Offset, PC_Relative,
|
|
|
|
|
Psect, Psect_Offset, Record_Type)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *Symbol;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int PC_Relative;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
int Psect_Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
int Record_Type;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register struct VMS_Symbol *vsp = Symbol->sy_obj;
|
|
|
|
|
char Local[32];
|
|
|
|
|
int local_sym = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We are writing a "Record_Type" record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Set_VMS_Object_File_Record (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the buffer is empty we must insert record type
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Set to the appropriate offset in the Psect.
|
|
|
|
|
* For a Code reference we need to fix the operand
|
|
|
|
|
* specifier as well, so back up 1 byte;
|
|
|
|
|
* for a Data reference we just store HERE.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
PC_Relative ? Psect_Offset - 1 : Psect_Offset,
|
|
|
|
|
Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make sure we are still generating a "Record Type" record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (Record_Type);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on symbol type (so we can stack its value)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (Symbol))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Global symbol
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_ABS:
|
|
|
|
|
local_sym = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
/*FALLTHRU*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_ABS | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef NOT_VAX_11_C_COMPATIBLE
|
|
|
|
|
case N_UNDF | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_DATA | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* NOT_VAX_11_C_COMPATIBLE */
|
|
|
|
|
case N_UNDF:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_TEXT | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Get the symbol name (case hacked)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Case_Hack_Symbol (S_GET_NAME (Symbol), Local);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack the global symbol value
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (!local_sym)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_GBL);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* Local symbols have an extra field. */
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_LSY);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_SHORT (Current_Environment);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_COUNTED_STRING (Local);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Offset)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack the longword offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_STA_LW);
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_LONG (Offset);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Add the two, leaving the result on the stack
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (TIR_S_C_OPR_ADD);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Uninitialized local data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_BSS:
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack the Psect (+offset)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
vms_tir_stack_psect (vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset + Offset,
|
|
|
|
|
0);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Local text
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_TEXT:
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack the Psect (+offset)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
vms_tir_stack_psect (vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (Symbol) + Offset,
|
|
|
|
|
0);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Initialized local or global data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_DATA:
|
|
|
|
|
#ifndef NOT_VAX_11_C_COMPATIBLE
|
|
|
|
|
case N_UNDF | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_DATA | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* NOT_VAX_11_C_COMPATIBLE */
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Stack the Psect (+offset)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
vms_tir_stack_psect (vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset + Offset,
|
|
|
|
|
0);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store either a code or data reference
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
PUT_CHAR (PC_Relative ? TIR_S_C_STO_PICR : TIR_S_C_STO_PIDR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset > (sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Check in the text area for an indirect pc-relative reference
|
|
|
|
|
* and fix it up with addressing mode 0xff [PC indirect]
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* THIS SHOULD BE REPLACED BY THE USE OF TIR_S_C_STO_PIRR IN THE
|
|
|
|
|
* PIC CODE GENERATING FIXUP ROUTINE.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Fix_Indirect_Reference (Text_Psect, Offset, fragP, text_frag_root)
|
|
|
|
|
int Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
int Offset;
|
|
|
|
|
register fragS *fragP;
|
|
|
|
|
fragS *text_frag_root;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* The addressing mode byte is 1 byte before the address
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Offset--;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Is it in THIS frag??
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Offset < fragP->fr_address) ||
|
|
|
|
|
(Offset >= (fragP->fr_address + fragP->fr_fix)))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* We need to search for the fragment containing this
|
|
|
|
|
* Offset
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (fragP = text_frag_root; fragP; fragP = fragP->fr_next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Offset >= fragP->fr_address) &&
|
|
|
|
|
(Offset < (fragP->fr_address + fragP->fr_fix)))
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If we couldn't find the frag, things are BAD!!
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fragP == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
error (_("Couldn't find fixup fragment when checking for indirect reference"));
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Check for indirect PC relative addressing mode
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fragP->fr_literal[Offset - fragP->fr_address] == (char) 0xff)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
static char Address_Mode = (char) 0xff;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Yes: Store the indirect mode back into the image
|
|
|
|
|
* to fix up the damage done by STO_PICR
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (Text_Psect, Offset, OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (&Address_Mode, 1, OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the procedure "main()" exists we have to add the instruction
|
|
|
|
|
* "jsb c$main_args" at the beginning to be compatible with VAX-11 "C".
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* FIXME: the macro name `HACK_DEC_C_STARTUP' should be renamed
|
|
|
|
|
* to `HACK_VAXCRTL_STARTUP' because Digital's compiler
|
|
|
|
|
* named "DEC C" uses run-time library "DECC$SHR", but this
|
|
|
|
|
* startup code is for "VAXCRTL", the library for Digital's
|
|
|
|
|
* older "VAX C". Also, this extra code isn't needed for
|
|
|
|
|
* supporting gcc because it already generates the VAXCRTL
|
|
|
|
|
* startup call when compiling main(). The reference to
|
|
|
|
|
* `flag_hash_long_names' looks very suspicious too;
|
|
|
|
|
* probably an old-style command line option was inadvertently
|
|
|
|
|
* overloaded here, then blindly converted into the new one.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
|
|
|
vms_check_for_main ()
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register symbolS *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef HACK_DEC_C_STARTUP /* JF */
|
|
|
|
|
register struct frchain *frchainP;
|
|
|
|
|
register fragS *fragP;
|
|
|
|
|
register fragS **prev_fragPP;
|
|
|
|
|
register struct fix *fixP;
|
|
|
|
|
register fragS *New_Frag;
|
|
|
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* HACK_DEC_C_STARTUP */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP = (symbolS *) symbol_find ("_main");
|
|
|
|
|
if (symbolP && !S_IS_DEBUG (symbolP) &&
|
|
|
|
|
S_IS_EXTERNAL (symbolP) && (S_GET_TYPE (symbolP) == N_TEXT))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef HACK_DEC_C_STARTUP
|
|
|
|
|
if (!flag_hash_long_names)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Remember the entry point symbol
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Entry_Point_Symbol = symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef HACK_DEC_C_STARTUP
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan all the fragment chains for the one with "_main"
|
|
|
|
|
* (Actually we know the fragment from the symbol, but we need
|
|
|
|
|
* the previous fragment so we can change its pointer)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
frchainP = frchain_root;
|
|
|
|
|
while (frchainP)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan all the fragments in this chain, remembering
|
|
|
|
|
* the "previous fragment"
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
prev_fragPP = &frchainP->frch_root;
|
|
|
|
|
fragP = frchainP->frch_root;
|
|
|
|
|
while (fragP && (fragP != frchainP->frch_last))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Is this the fragment?
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fragP == symbolP->sy_frag)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Yes: Modify the fragment by replacing
|
|
|
|
|
* it with a new fragment.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag = (fragS *)
|
|
|
|
|
xmalloc (sizeof (*New_Frag) +
|
|
|
|
|
fragP->fr_fix +
|
|
|
|
|
fragP->fr_var +
|
|
|
|
|
5);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* The fragments are the same except
|
|
|
|
|
* that the "fixed" area is larger
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*New_Frag = *fragP;
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_fix += 6;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Copy the literal data opening a hole
|
|
|
|
|
* 2 bytes after "_main" (i.e. just after
|
|
|
|
|
* the entry mask). Into which we place
|
|
|
|
|
* the JSB instruction.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[0] = fragP->fr_literal[0];
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[1] = fragP->fr_literal[1];
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[2] = 0x16; /* Jsb */
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[3] = 0xef;
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[4] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[5] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[6] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[7] = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 2; i < fragP->fr_fix + fragP->fr_var; i++)
|
|
|
|
|
New_Frag->fr_literal[i + 6] =
|
|
|
|
|
fragP->fr_literal[i];
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now replace the old fragment with the
|
|
|
|
|
* newly generated one.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
*prev_fragPP = New_Frag;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Remember the entry point symbol
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Entry_Point_Symbol = symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan the text area fixup structures
|
|
|
|
|
* as offsets in the fragment may have
|
|
|
|
|
* changed
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (fixP = text_fix_root; fixP; fixP = fixP->fx_next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Look for references to this
|
|
|
|
|
* fragment.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_frag == fragP)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Change the fragment
|
|
|
|
|
* pointer
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_frag = New_Frag;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the offset is after
|
|
|
|
|
* the entry mask we need
|
|
|
|
|
* to account for the JSB
|
|
|
|
|
* instruction we just
|
|
|
|
|
* inserted.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_where >= 2)
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_where += 6;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan the symbols as offsets in the
|
|
|
|
|
* fragment may have changed
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP = symbol_rootP;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP = symbol_next (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Look for references to this
|
|
|
|
|
* fragment.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (symbolP->sy_frag == fragP)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Change the fragment
|
|
|
|
|
* pointer
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_frag = New_Frag;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If the offset is after
|
|
|
|
|
* the entry mask we need
|
|
|
|
|
* to account for the JSB
|
|
|
|
|
* instruction we just
|
|
|
|
|
* inserted.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_VALUE (symbolP) >= 2)
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_VALUE (symbolP,
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (symbolP) + 6);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Make a symbol reference to
|
|
|
|
|
* "_c$main_args" so we can get
|
|
|
|
|
* its address inserted into the
|
|
|
|
|
* JSB instruction.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP = (symbolS *) xmalloc (sizeof (*symbolP));
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_NAME (symbolP, "_C$MAIN_ARGS");
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_TYPE (symbolP, N_UNDF);
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_OTHER (symbolP, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_DESC (symbolP, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_VALUE (symbolP, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_name_offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_number = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_obj = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_frag = New_Frag;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_resolved = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolP->sy_resolving = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/* this actually inserts at the beginning of the list */
|
|
|
|
|
symbol_append (symbol_rootP, symbolP,
|
|
|
|
|
&symbol_rootP, &symbol_lastP);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
symbol_rootP = symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Generate a text fixup structure
|
|
|
|
|
* to get "_c$main_args" stored into the
|
|
|
|
|
* JSB instruction.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
fixP = (struct fix *) xmalloc (sizeof (*fixP));
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_frag = New_Frag;
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_where = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_addsy = symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_subsy = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_size = 4;
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_pcrel = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_next = text_fix_root;
|
|
|
|
|
text_fix_root = fixP;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now make sure we exit from the loop
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
frchainP = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Try the next fragment
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
prev_fragPP = &fragP->fr_next;
|
|
|
|
|
fragP = fragP->fr_next;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Try the next fragment chain
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (frchainP)
|
|
|
|
|
frchainP = frchainP->frch_next;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
#endif /* HACK_DEC_C_STARTUP */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Beginning of vms_write_object_file().
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static
|
|
|
|
|
struct vms_obj_state {
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Next program section index to use. */
|
|
|
|
|
int psect_number;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Psect index for code. Always ends up #0. */
|
|
|
|
|
int text_psect;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Psect index for initialized static variables. */
|
|
|
|
|
int data_psect;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Psect index for uninitialized static variables. */
|
|
|
|
|
int bss_psect;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Psect index for static constructors. */
|
|
|
|
|
int ctors_psect;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Psect index for static destructors. */
|
|
|
|
|
int dtors_psect;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Number of bytes used for local symbol data. */
|
|
|
|
|
int local_initd_data_size;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Dynamic buffer for initialized data. */
|
|
|
|
|
char *data_segment;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
} vms_obj_state;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define Psect_Number vms_obj_state.psect_number
|
|
|
|
|
#define Text_Psect vms_obj_state.text_psect
|
|
|
|
|
#define Data_Psect vms_obj_state.data_psect
|
|
|
|
|
#define Bss_Psect vms_obj_state.bss_psect
|
|
|
|
|
#define Ctors_Psect vms_obj_state.ctors_psect
|
|
|
|
|
#define Dtors_Psect vms_obj_state.dtors_psect
|
|
|
|
|
#define Local_Initd_Data_Size vms_obj_state.local_initd_data_size
|
|
|
|
|
#define Data_Segment vms_obj_state.data_segment
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#define IS_GXX_VTABLE(symP) (strncmp (S_GET_NAME (symP), "__vt.", 5) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
#define IS_GXX_XTOR(symP) (strncmp (S_GET_NAME (symP), "__GLOBAL_.", 10) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
#define XTOR_SIZE 4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Perform text segment fixups. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
vms_fixup_text_section (text_siz, text_frag_root, data_frag_root)
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned text_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
struct frag *text_frag_root;
|
|
|
|
|
struct frag *data_frag_root;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register fragS *fragP;
|
|
|
|
|
register struct fix *fixP;
|
|
|
|
|
offsetT dif;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Scan the text fragments. */
|
|
|
|
|
for (fragP = text_frag_root; fragP; fragP = fragP->fr_next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* Stop if we get to the data fragments. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (fragP == data_frag_root)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Ignore fragments with no data. */
|
|
|
|
|
if ((fragP->fr_fix == 0) && (fragP->fr_var == 0))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Go the the appropriate offset in the Text Psect. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (Text_Psect, fragP->fr_address, OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store the "fixed" part. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (fragP->fr_fix)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (fragP->fr_literal,
|
|
|
|
|
fragP->fr_fix,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store the "variable" part. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (fragP->fr_var && fragP->fr_offset)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Repeated_Data (fragP->fr_offset,
|
|
|
|
|
fragP->fr_literal + fragP->fr_fix,
|
|
|
|
|
fragP->fr_var,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
} /* text frag loop */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now we go through the text segment fixups and generate
|
|
|
|
|
* TIR records to fix up addresses within the Text Psect.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (fixP = text_fix_root; fixP; fixP = fixP->fx_next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* We DO handle the case of "Symbol - Symbol" as
|
|
|
|
|
long as it is in the same segment. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_subsy && fixP->fx_addsy)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* They need to be in the same segment. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (fixP->fx_subsy) !=
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_RAW_TYPE (fixP->fx_addsy))
|
|
|
|
|
error (_("Fixup data addsy and subsy don't have the same type"));
|
|
|
|
|
/* And they need to be in one that we can check the psect on. */
|
|
|
|
|
if ((S_GET_TYPE (fixP->fx_addsy) != N_DATA) &&
|
|
|
|
|
(S_GET_TYPE (fixP->fx_addsy) != N_TEXT))
|
|
|
|
|
error (_("Fixup data addsy and subsy don't have an appropriate type"));
|
|
|
|
|
/* This had better not be PC relative! */
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_pcrel)
|
|
|
|
|
error (_("Fixup data is erroneously \"pcrel\""));
|
|
|
|
|
/* Subtract their values to get the difference. */
|
|
|
|
|
dif = S_GET_VALUE (fixP->fx_addsy) - S_GET_VALUE (fixP->fx_subsy);
|
|
|
|
|
md_number_to_chars (Local, (valueT)dif, fixP->fx_size);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Now generate the fixup object records;
|
|
|
|
|
set the psect and store the data. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (Text_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_where + fixP->fx_frag->fr_address,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_size,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
continue; /* done with this fixup */
|
|
|
|
|
} /* if fx_subsy && fx_addsy */
|
|
|
|
|
/* Size will HAVE to be "long". */
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_size != 4)
|
|
|
|
|
error (_("Fixup datum is not a longword"));
|
|
|
|
|
/* Symbol must be "added" (if it is ever
|
|
|
|
|
subtracted we can fix this assumption). */
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_addsy == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
error (_("Fixup datum is not \"fixP->fx_addsy\""));
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store the symbol value in a PIC fashion. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_PIC_Symbol_Reference (fixP->fx_addsy,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_offset,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_pcrel,
|
|
|
|
|
Text_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_where + fixP->fx_frag->fr_address,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Check for indirect address reference, which has to be fixed up
|
|
|
|
|
* (as the linker will screw it up with TIR_S_C_STO_PICR)...
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_pcrel)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Fix_Indirect_Reference (Text_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_where + fixP->fx_frag->fr_address,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_frag,
|
|
|
|
|
text_frag_root);
|
|
|
|
|
} /* text fix loop */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Create a buffer holding the data segment. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
synthesize_data_segment (data_siz, text_siz, data_frag_root)
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned data_siz, text_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
struct frag *data_frag_root;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register fragS *fragP;
|
|
|
|
|
char *fill_literal;
|
|
|
|
|
long fill_size, count, i;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Allocate the data segment. */
|
|
|
|
|
Data_Segment = (char *) xmalloc (data_siz);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Run through the data fragments, filling in the segment. */
|
|
|
|
|
for (fragP = data_frag_root; fragP; fragP = fragP->fr_next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
i = fragP->fr_address - text_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
if (fragP->fr_fix)
|
|
|
|
|
memcpy (Data_Segment + i, fragP->fr_literal, fragP->fr_fix);
|
|
|
|
|
i += fragP->fr_fix;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if ((fill_size = fragP->fr_var) != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
fill_literal = fragP->fr_literal + fragP->fr_fix;
|
|
|
|
|
for (count = fragP->fr_offset; count; count--)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
memcpy (Data_Segment + i, fill_literal, fill_size);
|
|
|
|
|
i += fill_size;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
} /* data frag loop */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Perform data segment fixups. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
vms_fixup_data_section (data_siz, text_siz)
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned data_siz, text_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register struct VMS_Symbol *vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
register struct fix *fixP;
|
|
|
|
|
register symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
addressT fr_address;
|
|
|
|
|
offsetT dif;
|
|
|
|
|
valueT val;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Run through all the data symbols and store the data. */
|
|
|
|
|
for (vsp = VMS_Symbols; vsp; vsp = vsp->Next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* Ignore anything other than data symbols. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_TYPE (vsp->Symbol) != N_DATA)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Set the Psect + Offset. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store the data. */
|
|
|
|
|
val = S_GET_VALUE (vsp->Symbol);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Data_Segment + val - text_siz,
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
} /* N_DATA symbol loop */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now we go through the data segment fixups and generate
|
|
|
|
|
* TIR records to fix up addresses within the Data Psects.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (fixP = data_fix_root; fixP; fixP = fixP->fx_next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* Find the symbol for the containing datum. */
|
|
|
|
|
for (vsp = VMS_Symbols; vsp; vsp = vsp->Next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* Only bother with Data symbols. */
|
|
|
|
|
sp = vsp->Symbol;
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_TYPE (sp) != N_DATA)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Ignore symbol if After fixup. */
|
|
|
|
|
val = S_GET_VALUE (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
fr_address = fixP->fx_frag->fr_address;
|
|
|
|
|
if (val > fixP->fx_where + fr_address)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/* See if the datum is here. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (val + vsp->Size <= fixP->fx_where + fr_address)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/* We DO handle the case of "Symbol - Symbol" as
|
|
|
|
|
long as it is in the same segment. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_subsy && fixP->fx_addsy)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* They need to be in the same segment. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (fixP->fx_subsy) !=
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_RAW_TYPE (fixP->fx_addsy))
|
|
|
|
|
error (_("Fixup data addsy and subsy don't have the same type"));
|
|
|
|
|
/* And they need to be in one that we can check the psect on. */
|
|
|
|
|
if ((S_GET_TYPE (fixP->fx_addsy) != N_DATA) &&
|
|
|
|
|
(S_GET_TYPE (fixP->fx_addsy) != N_TEXT))
|
|
|
|
|
error (_("Fixup data addsy and subsy don't have an appropriate type"));
|
|
|
|
|
/* This had better not be PC relative! */
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_pcrel)
|
|
|
|
|
error (_("Fixup data is erroneously \"pcrel\""));
|
|
|
|
|
/* Subtract their values to get the difference. */
|
|
|
|
|
dif = S_GET_VALUE (fixP->fx_addsy) - S_GET_VALUE (fixP->fx_subsy);
|
|
|
|
|
md_number_to_chars (Local, (valueT)dif, fixP->fx_size);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now generate the fixup object records;
|
|
|
|
|
* set the psect and store the data.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
fr_address + fixP->fx_where
|
|
|
|
|
- val + vsp->Psect_Offset,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_Immediate_Data (Local,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_size,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
break; /* done with this fixup */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* Size will HAVE to be "long". */
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_size != 4)
|
|
|
|
|
error (_("Fixup datum is not a longword"));
|
|
|
|
|
/* Symbol must be "added" (if it is ever
|
|
|
|
|
subtracted we can fix this assumption). */
|
|
|
|
|
if (fixP->fx_addsy == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
error (_("Fixup datum is not \"fixP->fx_addsy\""));
|
|
|
|
|
/* Store the symbol value in a PIC fashion. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Store_PIC_Symbol_Reference (fixP->fx_addsy,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_offset,
|
|
|
|
|
fixP->fx_pcrel,
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
fr_address + fixP->fx_where
|
|
|
|
|
- val + vsp->Psect_Offset,
|
|
|
|
|
OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Done with this fixup. */
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
} /* vms_symbol loop */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
} /* data fix loop */
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Perform ctors/dtors segment fixups. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
vms_fixup_xtors_section (symbols, sect_no)
|
|
|
|
|
struct VMS_Symbol *symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
int sect_no;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register struct VMS_Symbol *vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Run through all the symbols and store the data. */
|
|
|
|
|
for (vsp = symbols; vsp; vsp = vsp->Next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Set relocation base. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Psect (vsp->Psect_Index, vsp->Psect_Offset, OBJ_S_C_TIR);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
sp = vsp->Symbol;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Stack the Psect base with its offset. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Set_Data (Text_Psect, S_GET_VALUE (sp), OBJ_S_C_TIR, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* Flush the buffer if it is more than 75% full. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Object_Record_Offset > (sizeof (Object_Record_Buffer) * 3 / 4))
|
|
|
|
|
Flush_VMS_Object_Record_Buffer ();
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Define symbols for the linker. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
global_symbol_directory (text_siz, data_siz)
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned text_siz, data_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register fragS *fragP;
|
|
|
|
|
register symbolS *sp;
|
|
|
|
|
register struct VMS_Symbol *vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
int Globalref, define_as_global_symbol;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#if 0
|
|
|
|
|
/* The g++ compiler does not write out external references to
|
|
|
|
|
vtables correctly. Check for this and holler if we see it
|
|
|
|
|
happening. If that compiler bug is ever fixed we can remove
|
|
|
|
|
this.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(Jun'95: gcc 2.7.0's cc1plus still exhibits this behavior.)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This was reportedly fixed as of June 2, 1998. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
for (sp = symbol_rootP; sp; sp = symbol_next (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (sp) == N_UNDF && IS_GXX_VTABLE (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_TYPE (sp, N_UNDF | N_EXT);
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_OTHER (sp, 1);
|
|
|
|
|
as_warn (_("g++ wrote an extern reference to `%s' as a routine.\nI will fix it, but I hope that it was note really a routine."),
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_NAME (sp));
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now scan the symbols and emit the appropriate GSD records
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (sp = symbol_rootP; sp; sp = symbol_next (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
define_as_global_symbol = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Dispatch on symbol type. */
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Global uninitialized data. */
|
|
|
|
|
case N_UNDF | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
/* Make a VMS data symbol entry. */
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = (struct VMS_Symbol *) xmalloc (sizeof *vsp);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Symbol = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size = S_GET_VALUE (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Psect_Number++;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Next = VMS_Symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Symbols = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
sp->sy_obj = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Make the psect for this data. */
|
|
|
|
|
Globalref = VMS_Psect_Spec (S_GET_NAME (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size,
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_OTHER (sp) ? ps_CONST : ps_COMMON,
|
|
|
|
|
vsp);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Globalref)
|
|
|
|
|
Psect_Number--;
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef NOT_VAX_11_C_COMPATIBLE
|
|
|
|
|
define_as_global_symbol = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
#else
|
|
|
|
|
/* See if this is an external vtable. We want to help the
|
|
|
|
|
linker find these things in libraries, so we make a symbol
|
|
|
|
|
reference. This is not compatible with VAX-C usage for
|
|
|
|
|
variables, but since vtables are only used internally by
|
|
|
|
|
g++, we can get away with this hack. */
|
|
|
|
|
define_as_global_symbol = IS_GXX_VTABLE (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Local uninitialized data. */
|
|
|
|
|
case N_BSS:
|
|
|
|
|
/* Make a VMS data symbol entry. */
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = (struct VMS_Symbol *) xmalloc (sizeof *vsp);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Symbol = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Bss_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset = S_GET_VALUE (sp) - bss_address_frag.fr_address;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Next = VMS_Symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Symbols = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
sp->sy_obj = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Global initialized data. */
|
|
|
|
|
case N_DATA | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
/* Make a VMS data symbol entry. */
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = (struct VMS_Symbol *) xmalloc (sizeof *vsp);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Symbol = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size = VMS_Initialized_Data_Size (sp, text_siz + data_siz);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Psect_Number++;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Next = VMS_Symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Symbols = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
sp->sy_obj = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
/* Make its psect. */
|
|
|
|
|
Globalref = VMS_Psect_Spec (S_GET_NAME (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size,
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_OTHER (sp) ? ps_CONST : ps_COMMON,
|
|
|
|
|
vsp);
|
|
|
|
|
if (Globalref)
|
|
|
|
|
Psect_Number--;
|
|
|
|
|
#ifdef NOT_VAX_11_C_COMPATIBLE
|
|
|
|
|
define_as_global_symbol = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
#else
|
|
|
|
|
/* See N_UNDF|N_EXT above for explanation. */
|
|
|
|
|
define_as_global_symbol = IS_GXX_VTABLE (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Local initialized data. */
|
|
|
|
|
case N_DATA:
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *sym_name = S_GET_NAME (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Always suppress local numeric labels. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (sym_name && strcmp (sym_name, FAKE_LABEL_NAME) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Make a VMS data symbol entry. */
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = (struct VMS_Symbol *) xmalloc (sizeof *vsp);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Symbol = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size = VMS_Initialized_Data_Size (sp, text_siz + data_siz);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Data_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset = Local_Initd_Data_Size;
|
|
|
|
|
Local_Initd_Data_Size += vsp->Size;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Next = VMS_Symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Symbols = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
sp->sy_obj = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Global Text definition. */
|
|
|
|
|
case N_TEXT | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (IS_GXX_XTOR (sp))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = (struct VMS_Symbol *) xmalloc (sizeof *vsp);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Symbol = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size = XTOR_SIZE;
|
|
|
|
|
sp->sy_obj = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
switch ((S_GET_NAME (sp))[10])
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case 'I':
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Ctors_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset = (Ctors_Symbols==0)?0:(Ctors_Symbols->Psect_Offset+XTOR_SIZE);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Next = Ctors_Symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
Ctors_Symbols = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 'D':
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Dtors_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset = (Dtors_Symbols==0)?0:(Dtors_Symbols->Psect_Offset+XTOR_SIZE);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Next = Dtors_Symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
Dtors_Symbols = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case 'G':
|
|
|
|
|
as_warn (_("Can't handle global xtors symbols yet."));
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
as_warn (_("Unknown %s"), S_GET_NAME (sp));
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned short Entry_Mask;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Get the entry mask. */
|
|
|
|
|
fragP = sp->sy_frag;
|
|
|
|
|
/* First frag might be empty if we're generating listings.
|
|
|
|
|
So skip empty rs_fill frags. */
|
|
|
|
|
while (fragP && fragP->fr_type == rs_fill && fragP->fr_fix == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
fragP = fragP->fr_next;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* If first frag doesn't contain the data, what do we do?
|
|
|
|
|
If it's possibly smaller than two bytes, that would
|
|
|
|
|
imply that the entry mask is not stored where we're
|
|
|
|
|
expecting it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you can find a test case that triggers this, report
|
|
|
|
|
it (and tell me what the entry mask field ought to be),
|
|
|
|
|
and I'll try to fix it. KR */
|
|
|
|
|
if (fragP->fr_fix < 2)
|
|
|
|
|
abort ();
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Entry_Mask = (fragP->fr_literal[0] & 0x00ff) |
|
|
|
|
|
((fragP->fr_literal[1] & 0x00ff) << 8);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Define the procedure entry point. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Procedure_Entry_Pt (S_GET_NAME (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
Text_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
Entry_Mask);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Local Text definition. */
|
|
|
|
|
case N_TEXT:
|
|
|
|
|
/* Make a VMS data symbol entry. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Text_Psect != -1)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = (struct VMS_Symbol *) xmalloc (sizeof *vsp);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Symbol = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Text_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset = S_GET_VALUE (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Next = VMS_Symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Symbols = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
sp->sy_obj = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Global Reference. */
|
|
|
|
|
case N_UNDF:
|
|
|
|
|
/* Make a GSD global symbol reference record. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (S_GET_NAME (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
0,
|
|
|
|
|
0,
|
|
|
|
|
GBLSYM_REF);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Absolute symbol. */
|
|
|
|
|
case N_ABS:
|
|
|
|
|
case N_ABS | N_EXT:
|
|
|
|
|
/* gcc doesn't generate these;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Emit_Globalvalue handles them though. */
|
|
|
|
|
vsp = (struct VMS_Symbol *) xmalloc (sizeof *vsp);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Symbol = sp;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Size = 4; /* always assume 32 bits */
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Offset = S_GET_VALUE (sp);
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Next = VMS_Symbols;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Symbols = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
sp->sy_obj = vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Anything else. */
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
/* Ignore STAB symbols, including .stabs emitted by g++. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_IS_DEBUG (sp) || (S_GET_TYPE (sp) == 22))
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Error otherwise.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
as_tsktsk (_("unhandled stab type %d"), S_GET_TYPE (sp));
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Global symbols have different linkage than external variables. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (define_as_global_symbol)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (S_GET_NAME (sp),
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index,
|
|
|
|
|
0,
|
|
|
|
|
GBLSYM_DEF);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Output debugger symbol table information for symbols which
|
|
|
|
|
are local to a specific routine. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
local_symbols_DST (s0P, Current_Routine)
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *s0P, *Current_Routine;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *s1P;
|
|
|
|
|
char *s0P_name, *pnt0, *pnt1;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
s0P_name = S_GET_NAME (s0P);
|
|
|
|
|
if (*s0P_name++ != '_')
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
for (s1P = Current_Routine; s1P; s1P = symbol_next (s1P))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
#if 0 /* redundant; RAW_TYPE != N_FUN suffices */
|
|
|
|
|
if (!S_IS_DEBUG (s1P))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
if (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (s1P) != N_FUN)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt0 = s0P_name;
|
|
|
|
|
pnt1 = S_GET_NAME (s1P);
|
|
|
|
|
/* We assume the two strings are never exactly equal... */
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pnt0++ == *pnt1++)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* Found it if s0P name is exhausted and s1P name has ":F" or ":f" next.
|
|
|
|
|
Note: both pointers have advanced one past the non-matching char. */
|
|
|
|
|
if ((*pnt1 == 'F' || *pnt1 == 'f') && *--pnt1 == ':' && *--pnt0 == '\0')
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Define_Routine (s1P, 0, Current_Routine, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Construct and output the debug symbol table. */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static void
|
|
|
|
|
vms_build_DST (text_siz)
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned text_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register symbolS *symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
symbolS *Current_Routine = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
struct input_file *Cur_File = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
offsetT Cur_Offset = -1;
|
|
|
|
|
int Cur_Line_Number = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int File_Number = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int Debugger_Offset = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
int file_available;
|
|
|
|
|
int dsc;
|
|
|
|
|
offsetT val;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Write the Traceback Begin Module record. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Module_Begin ();
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Output debugging info for global variables and static variables
|
|
|
|
|
* that are not specific to one routine. We also need to examine
|
|
|
|
|
* all stabs directives, to find the definitions to all of the
|
|
|
|
|
* advanced data types, and this is done by VMS_LSYM_Parse. This
|
|
|
|
|
* needs to be done before any definitions are output to the object
|
|
|
|
|
* file, since there can be forward references in the stabs
|
|
|
|
|
* directives. When through with parsing, the text of the stabs
|
|
|
|
|
* directive is altered, with the definitions removed, so that later
|
|
|
|
|
* passes will see directives as they would be written if the type
|
|
|
|
|
* were already defined.
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* We also look for files and include files, and make a list of
|
|
|
|
|
* them. We examine the source file numbers to establish the actual
|
|
|
|
|
* lines that code was generated from, and then generate offsets.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_LSYM_Parse ();
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP = symbol_rootP; symbolP; symbolP = symbol_next (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* Only deal with STAB symbols here. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (!S_IS_DEBUG (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on STAB type.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
case N_SLINE:
|
|
|
|
|
dsc = S_GET_DESC (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
if (dsc > Cur_File->max_line)
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File->max_line = dsc;
|
|
|
|
|
if (dsc < Cur_File->min_line)
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File->min_line = dsc;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_SO:
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File = find_file (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File->flag = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File->min_line = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_SOL:
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File = find_file (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_GSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_GSYM_Parse (symbolP, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_LCSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_LCSYM_Parse (symbolP, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
case N_FUN: /* For static constant symbols */
|
|
|
|
|
case N_STSYM:
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_STSYM_Parse (symbolP, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
} /* switch */
|
|
|
|
|
} /* for */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Now we take a quick sweep through the files and assign offsets
|
|
|
|
|
* to each one. This will essentially be the starting line number to
|
|
|
|
|
* the debugger for each file. Output the info for the debugger to
|
|
|
|
|
* specify the files, and then tell it how many lines to use.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (Cur_File = file_root; Cur_File; Cur_File = Cur_File->next)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
if (Cur_File->max_line == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
if ((strncmp (Cur_File->name, "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", 16) == 0) &&
|
|
|
|
|
!flag_debug)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
if ((strncmp (Cur_File->name, "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", 15) == 0) &&
|
|
|
|
|
!flag_debug)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/* show a few extra lines at the start of the region selected */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Cur_File->min_line > 2)
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File->min_line -= 2;
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File->offset = Debugger_Offset - Cur_File->min_line + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
Debugger_Offset += Cur_File->max_line - Cur_File->min_line + 1;
|
|
|
|
|
if (Cur_File->same_file_fpnt)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File->file_number = Cur_File->same_file_fpnt->file_number;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File->file_number = ++File_Number;
|
|
|
|
|
file_available = VMS_TBT_Source_File (Cur_File->name,
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File->file_number);
|
|
|
|
|
if (!file_available)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File->file_number = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
File_Number--;
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Source_Lines (Cur_File->file_number,
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File->min_line,
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File->max_line - Cur_File->min_line + 1);
|
|
|
|
|
} /* for */
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File = (struct input_file *) NULL;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Scan the symbols and write out the routines
|
|
|
|
|
* (this makes the assumption that symbols are in
|
|
|
|
|
* order of ascending text segment offset)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (symbolP = symbol_rootP; symbolP; symbolP = symbol_next (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Deal with text symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (!S_IS_DEBUG (symbolP) && S_GET_TYPE (symbolP) == N_TEXT)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Ignore symbols starting with "L", as they are local symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (*S_GET_NAME (symbolP) == 'L')
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If there is a routine start defined, terminate it.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Current_Routine)
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Routine_End (text_siz, Current_Routine);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Check for & skip dummy labels like "gcc_compiled.".
|
|
|
|
|
* They're identified by the IN_DEFAULT_SECTION flag.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if ((S_GET_OTHER (symbolP) & IN_DEFAULT_SECTION) != 0 &&
|
|
|
|
|
S_GET_VALUE (symbolP) == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Store the routine begin traceback info.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Routine_Begin (symbolP, Text_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
Current_Routine = symbolP;
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define symbols local to this routine.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
local_symbols_DST (symbolP, Current_Routine);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Done
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Deal with STAB symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
else if (S_IS_DEBUG (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Dispatch on STAB type.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
switch (S_GET_RAW_TYPE (symbolP))
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Line number
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_SLINE:
|
|
|
|
|
/* Offset the line into the correct portion of the file. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (Cur_File->file_number == 0)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
val = S_GET_VALUE (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Sometimes the same offset gets several source lines
|
|
|
|
|
assigned to it. We should be selective about which
|
|
|
|
|
lines we allow, we should prefer lines that are in
|
|
|
|
|
the main source file when debugging inline functions. */
|
|
|
|
|
if (val == Cur_Offset && Cur_File->file_number != 1)
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* calculate actual debugger source line */
|
|
|
|
|
dsc = S_GET_DESC (symbolP) + Cur_File->offset;
|
|
|
|
|
S_SET_DESC (symbolP, dsc);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define PC/Line correlation.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Cur_Offset == -1)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* First N_SLINE; set up initial correlation.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Line_PC_Correlation (dsc,
|
|
|
|
|
val,
|
|
|
|
|
Text_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else if ((dsc - Cur_Line_Number) <= 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Line delta is not +ve, we need to close the line and
|
|
|
|
|
* start a new PC/Line correlation.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Line_PC_Correlation (0,
|
|
|
|
|
val - Cur_Offset,
|
|
|
|
|
0,
|
|
|
|
|
-1);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Line_PC_Correlation (dsc,
|
|
|
|
|
val,
|
|
|
|
|
Text_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Line delta is +ve, all is well.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Line_PC_Correlation (dsc - Cur_Line_Number,
|
|
|
|
|
val - Cur_Offset,
|
|
|
|
|
0,
|
|
|
|
|
1);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/* Update the current line/PC info. */
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_Line_Number = dsc;
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_Offset = val;
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Source file
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
case N_SO:
|
|
|
|
|
/* Remember that we had a source file and emit
|
|
|
|
|
the source file debugger record. */
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File = find_file (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
case N_SOL:
|
|
|
|
|
/* We need to make sure that we are really in the actual
|
|
|
|
|
source file when we compute the maximum line number.
|
|
|
|
|
Otherwise the debugger gets really confused. */
|
|
|
|
|
Cur_File = find_file (symbolP);
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
} /* switch */
|
|
|
|
|
} /* if (IS_DEBUG) */
|
|
|
|
|
} /* for */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* If there is a routine start defined, terminate it
|
|
|
|
|
* (and the line numbers).
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Current_Routine)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
/* Terminate the line numbers. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Line_PC_Correlation (0,
|
|
|
|
|
text_siz - S_GET_VALUE (Current_Routine),
|
|
|
|
|
0,
|
|
|
|
|
-1);
|
|
|
|
|
/* Terminate the routine. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Routine_End (text_siz, Current_Routine);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Write the Traceback End Module TBT record. */
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_TBT_Module_End ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Write a VAX/VMS object file (everything else has been done!). */
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
void
|
|
|
|
|
vms_write_object_file (text_siz, data_siz, bss_siz, text_frag_root,
|
|
|
|
|
data_frag_root)
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned text_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned data_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
unsigned bss_siz;
|
|
|
|
|
fragS *text_frag_root;
|
|
|
|
|
fragS *data_frag_root;
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
register struct VMS_Symbol *vsp;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Initialize program section indices; values get updated later.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Psect_Number = 0; /* next Psect Index to use */
|
|
|
|
|
Text_Psect = -1; /* Text Psect Index */
|
|
|
|
|
Data_Psect = -2; /* Data Psect Index JF: Was -1 */
|
|
|
|
|
Bss_Psect = -3; /* Bss Psect Index JF: Was -1 */
|
|
|
|
|
Ctors_Psect = -4; /* Ctors Psect Index */
|
|
|
|
|
Dtors_Psect = -5; /* Dtors Psect Index */
|
|
|
|
|
/* Initialize other state variables. */
|
|
|
|
|
Data_Segment = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
Local_Initd_Data_Size = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Create the actual output file and populate it with required
|
|
|
|
|
* "module header" information.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Create_VMS_Object_File ();
|
|
|
|
|
Write_VMS_MHD_Records ();
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Create the Data segment:
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
* Since this is REALLY hard to do any other way,
|
|
|
|
|
* we actually manufacture the data segment and
|
|
|
|
|
* then store the appropriate values out of it.
|
|
|
|
|
* We need to generate this early, so that globalvalues
|
|
|
|
|
* can be properly emitted.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (data_siz > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
synthesize_data_segment (data_siz, text_siz, data_frag_root);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/******* Global Symbol Directory *******/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Emit globalvalues now. We must do this before the text psect is
|
|
|
|
|
* defined, or we will get linker warnings about multiply defined
|
|
|
|
|
* symbols. All of the globalvalues "reference" psect 0, although
|
|
|
|
|
* it really does not have anything to do with it.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Emit_Globalvalues (text_siz, data_siz, Data_Segment);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define the Text Psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Text_Psect = Psect_Number++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Psect_Spec ("$code", text_siz, ps_TEXT, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define the BSS Psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (bss_siz > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Bss_Psect = Psect_Number++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Psect_Spec ("$uninitialized_data", bss_siz, ps_DATA, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define symbols to the linker.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
global_symbol_directory (text_siz, data_siz);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Define the Data Psect
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (data_siz > 0 && Local_Initd_Data_Size > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
Data_Psect = Psect_Number++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Psect_Spec ("$data", Local_Initd_Data_Size, ps_DATA, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Local initialized data (N_DATA) symbols need to be updated to the
|
|
|
|
|
* proper value of Data_Psect now that it's actually been defined.
|
|
|
|
|
* (A dummy value was used in global_symbol_directory() above.)
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
for (vsp = VMS_Symbols; vsp; vsp = vsp->Next)
|
|
|
|
|
if (vsp->Psect_Index < 0 && S_GET_RAW_TYPE (vsp->Symbol) == N_DATA)
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Data_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (Ctors_Symbols != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *ps_name = "$ctors";
|
|
|
|
|
Ctors_Psect = Psect_Number++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Psect_Spec (ps_name, Ctors_Symbols->Psect_Offset + XTOR_SIZE,
|
|
|
|
|
ps_CTORS, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (ps_name, Ctors_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
0, GBLSYM_DEF|GBLSYM_WEAK);
|
|
|
|
|
for (vsp = Ctors_Symbols; vsp; vsp = vsp->Next)
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Ctors_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (Dtors_Symbols != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
char *ps_name = "$dtors";
|
|
|
|
|
Dtors_Psect = Psect_Number++;
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Psect_Spec (ps_name, Dtors_Symbols->Psect_Offset + XTOR_SIZE,
|
|
|
|
|
ps_DTORS, 0);
|
|
|
|
|
VMS_Global_Symbol_Spec (ps_name, Dtors_Psect,
|
|
|
|
|
0, GBLSYM_DEF|GBLSYM_WEAK);
|
|
|
|
|
for (vsp = Dtors_Symbols; vsp; vsp = vsp->Next)
|
|
|
|
|
vsp->Psect_Index = Dtors_Psect;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/******* Text Information and Relocation Records *******/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the text segment data
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (text_siz > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
vms_fixup_text_section (text_siz, text_frag_root, data_frag_root);
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the data segment data, then discard it.
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (data_siz > 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
vms_fixup_data_section (data_siz, text_siz);
|
|
|
|
|
free (Data_Segment), Data_Segment = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (Ctors_Symbols != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
vms_fixup_xtors_section (Ctors_Symbols, Ctors_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (Dtors_Symbols != 0)
|
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
vms_fixup_xtors_section (Dtors_Symbols, Dtors_Psect);
|
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/******* Debugger Symbol Table Records *******/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
vms_build_DST (text_siz);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/******* Wrap things up *******/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* Write the End Of Module record
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
if (Entry_Point_Symbol)
|
|
|
|
|
Write_VMS_EOM_Record (Text_Psect, S_GET_VALUE (Entry_Point_Symbol));
|
|
|
|
|
else
|
|
|
|
|
Write_VMS_EOM_Record (-1, (valueT) 0);
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
|
|
|
* All done, close the object file
|
|
|
|
|
*/
|
|
|
|
|
Close_VMS_Object_File ();
|
|
|
|
|
}
|